{"title":"Used","description":"\u003cp\u003ePre-owned items we opened, tested and graded by hand — \u003cstrong\u003eUsed – good\u003c\/strong\u003e (light wear from normal use) and \u003cstrong\u003eUsed – fair\u003c\/strong\u003e (visible wear, read the condition note). Every one works; the grade and the note on the listing say exactly what we found. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/condition-guide\"\u003eHow we grade\u003c\/a\u003e · 30-day returns.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"seypon-fuel-injectors-fits-for-honda-accord-2003-2007-odyssey-2005-2016-pilot-2","title":"SeyPon 6-Pack Fuel Injectors Honda Accord\/Odyssey\/Pilot V6 OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Untested, Appears used\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — this set has been previously opened and shows signs of use. The injectors are untested and sold as-is. Please review all photos and fitment details before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is a complete set of 6 SeyPon fuel injectors designed as a direct replacement for Honda V6 engines across multiple popular platforms. Whether you're servicing a Honda Accord, Odyssey, or Pilot, these injectors are built to match OEM fitment specs. The photo shows all 6 injectors — each features a black polymer body, orange O-ring base seal, white lower tip, and a 2-pin electrical connector, consistent with the OEM-style 16450-RCA-A01 profile commonly referenced for these Honda V6 applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eComparable sold listings confirm these injectors are used across Honda Accord 2003–2007 (3.0L V6), Odyssey 2005–2016 (3.5L V6), and Pilot 2005–2011 (3.5L V6), as well as compatible Acura platforms. If you're replacing a full bank or all six on a V6 engine, this set covers you in one purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFitment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHonda Accord 2003–2007 (3.0L V6)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHonda Odyssey 2005–2016 (3.5L V6)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHonda Pilot (V6 — confirm year range against your vehicle)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e6x SeyPon fuel injectors (as shown in photos)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo additional accessories confirmed — open box, contents are as pictured\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrand: SeyPon\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eQuantity: 6 injectors (full V6 set)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConnector type: 2-pin electrical connector\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eO-ring: Orange base seal, white tip seal\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOEM reference: 16450-RCA-A01 (cross-reference; verify fitment)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEngine type: V6 (3.0L \/ 3.5L Honda applications)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese injectors are sold in open-box, untested condition. We recommend professional installation and testing prior to use. Buyers should verify fitment using their vehicle's VIN or consult a parts professional before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"SeyPon","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46621126131947,"sku":"LPNO289653787","price":17.69,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/1b236321-b00b-494c-a8dc-822a8506037e.jpg?v=1753157496"},{"product_id":"moog-k100312-front-upper-suspension-ball-joint-for-jeep-wrangler","title":"MOOG K100312 Front Upper Suspension Ball Joint for Jeep Wrangler","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition: \u003c\/strong\u003eUsed good \u003cbr\u003e\u003cem\u003eUntested, Opened box, Lightly used\u003c\/em\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMOOG K100312 Front Upper Suspension Ball Joint for Jeep Wrangler\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCOMPATIBILITY – Fits 1994-2001 Dodge Ram 1500; 1994-1996 Dodge Ram 2500; 2018-2018 Jeep Wrangler JK; 1984-2001 Jeep Cherokee; 1986-1999 Jeep Cherokee; 1986-1992 Jeep Comanche; 1993-1998 Jeep Grand Cherokee; 1999-2004 Jeep Grand Cherokee; 1993-1993 Jeep Grand Wagoneer; 1984-1988 Jeep Wagoneer; 1989-1990 Jeep Wagoneer; 1987-1995 Jeep Wrangler; 1997-2006 Jeep Wrangler; 2007-2017 Jeep Wrangler; 1997-2006 Jeep TJ\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHardened ball stud made of OE equivalent or better materials to withstand higher loads Easy to install. \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConstruction and design validated by MOOG engineers Premium forged housing with increased cross section of up to 52% more material in key area Broad coverage for foreign and domestic applications Greaseable socket inhibits rust and wear by allowing new lubricant to flush debris\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Moog","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46621291872491,"sku":"LPNO290902661-1","price":65.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/Untitled_design_62.png?v=1755064260"},{"product_id":"mens-suits-slim-fit-3-piece-business-wedding-tuxedo-jacket-vest-pants-suit-set","title":"Lanshion Mens Slim Fit 3-Piece Suit Light Grey Jacket Vest Pants XL OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. pre-owned, lightly used\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — this item is pre-owned and lightly used. It has been previously worn and shows minor signs of use consistent with light wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStep up your formal game with this light grey slim fit 3-piece suit set. Designed for men who want a sharp, tailored silhouette without sacrificing versatility, this set is ready for weddings, business meetings, prom nights, or any formal occasion that calls for polished style. The clean solid light grey colourway keeps things classic and easy to coordinate with a wide variety of shirts, ties, and accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe single-breasted jacket features a refined notch lapel and a one-button front closure — a modern, streamlined look that sits flattering on the slim fit frame. A single back vent keeps movement comfortable, and a decorative pocket square is included in the breast pocket for a finishing touch right out of the box. The matching vest layers seamlessly under the jacket for a complete three-piece look, and the flat-front trousers complete the ensemble with a clean, wrinkle-resistant drape that photographs beautifully.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSlim fit suit jacket — light grey, single-breasted, one-button, notch lapel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMatching vest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMatching flat-front trousers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eKey Specs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSize:\u003c\/strong\u003e XL\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFit:\u003c\/strong\u003e Slim Fit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Light Grey\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePattern:\u003c\/strong\u003e Solid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of Pieces:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJacket Style:\u003c\/strong\u003e Single Breasted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLapel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Notch Lapel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eButton Style:\u003c\/strong\u003e One Button\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVent:\u003c\/strong\u003e Single-Vented\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFront Type:\u003c\/strong\u003e Flat Front\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Wedding, Business, Formal\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDepartment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Men\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis suit set is pre-owned and lightly used. Expect minor wrinkles from storage — a quick press or steam will restore a crisp, ready-to-wear appearance. Please review all photos carefully before purchasing, as this is a secondhand item sold as-is.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lanshion","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46645079736555,"sku":"B0D6YDQDWS","price":74.97,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71187648-8f3e-4311-a543-dd653ac5b602.jpg?v=1753765686"},{"product_id":"engine-timing-chain-cover-with-gasket-fit-for-vw-beetle-jetta-passat-tiguan-shar","title":"Timing Chain Cover Kit with Gasket for VW Beetle Jetta Passat Tiguan OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Untested, Pre-owned, Lightly used\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — this item has been previously opened and shows light signs of use. It has not been tested by our facility and is sold as-is in the condition shown.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep your Volkswagen's timing system properly protected with this engine timing chain cover kit. Designed as a direct-fit replacement for multiple VW platforms, this set includes everything needed to complete a timing cover service in one package. The kit is compatible with the VW Beetle, Jetta, Passat, and Tiguan, making it a versatile solution for technicians and DIY mechanics working across the VW lineup. The covers are precision-molded to match OE contours, ensuring a proper seal and alignment with the engine block.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Kit\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs shown in the photo of the actual unit, this open-box kit includes the following components:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLower timing chain cover (front engine cover with crankshaft seal bore)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUpper timing chain cover \/ belt guard (plastic, black)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFull-perimeter timing cover gasket\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCrankshaft seal \/ O-ring\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eComplete hardware set — standard bolts and shoulder bolts with thread-lock coating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFitment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis timing chain cover kit is designed to fit the following Volkswagen models:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVW Beetle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVW Jetta\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVW Passat\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVW Tiguan\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003ePlease verify compatibility with your specific engine code and model year before purchasing. Sold comps confirm applicability across 1.8T and 2.0T TSI\/TFSI engine families common to these platforms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncludes: upper cover, lower cover, gasket, crankshaft seal, and bolts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: reinforced plastic (upper cover), metal\/composite (lower cover)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBolt coating: blue thread-lock pre-applied\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFitment: VW Beetle, Jetta, Passat, Tiguan\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEngine compatibility: 1.8T \/ 2.0T TSI \/ TFSI\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is an open-box, pre-owned item rated as lightly used. It has not been tested or inspected beyond a visual check. Please review all photos carefully before purchasing. What you see in the listing photos is exactly what you will receive — no additional parts or packaging are included beyond those shown.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"JAVOUKA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46645278474475,"sku":"LPNO346000082","price":24.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/2f5a8dc3-de5e-4ec2-b62f-774baea6d18e.jpg?v=1753770610"},{"product_id":"tykick-74505-06-voltage-regulator-rectifier-for-harley-davidson-2006-2008-electra-glide-road-glide-road-king-street-glide-7450506-74505-06a-7450506a-498269-49-8269-498276-49-8276-fhada204g018-h0506","title":"Tykick 74505-06 Voltage Regulator Rectifier Harley Touring OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. untested, pre-owned, lightly used, broken connector tab\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — untested, pre-owned, lightly used, with a broken connector tab. Please review all photos and condition notes carefully before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is a Tykick aftermarket voltage regulator rectifier, part number 74505-06 (also cross-references 74622-06), designed as a direct replacement for 2006–2008 Harley-Davidson Touring models. The voltage regulator rectifier is a critical component in your motorcycle's charging system: it converts the AC output from the alternator into DC current and regulates voltage to protect your battery and electrical accessories from overcharge. A failing OEM unit is a common issue on these Touring bikes, and this Tykick replacement is built to restore proper charging function.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe unit is constructed from metal with a bracket-mount design and features a finned heat-sink top for thermal management — visible in the photo. It uses the OEM-style mounting feet for a direct bolt-on installation. Please note that one connector tab is broken, so inspect your wiring harness connector compatibility before installing. Because this item is untested, we recommend having it evaluated or bench-tested by a qualified technician prior to installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFitment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2006 Harley-Davidson Touring (FLH \/ FLT series)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2007 Harley-Davidson Touring (FLH \/ FLT series)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2008 Harley-Davidson Touring (FLH \/ FLT series)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFits models including Road King (FLHR), Street Glide, Road Glide, Electra Glide, Ultra Classic, and other Touring variants for these years\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOEM reference: 74505-06 \/ 74622-06\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1x Tykick voltage regulator rectifier (74505-06)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo additional accessories, hardware, or packaging included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrand: Tykick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePart Number: 74505-06 \/ 74622-06\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Voltage Regulator Rectifier\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: Metal\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMounting Style: Bracket Mount\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eQuantity: 1 unit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCondition: Open Box — untested, pre-owned, lightly used, broken connector tab\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eA great candidate for a budget repair or a parts bike. If you have any questions about fitment or condition, please reach out before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Tykick","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46655520538859,"sku":"LPNO345918015","price":9.84,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/Untitled_design_70_0a36a1ee-c963-44e0-86e3-9386e2189b66.png?v=1755065166"},{"product_id":"timing-chain-kit-w-cvvt-gear-for-hyundai-elantra-2014-2016-elantra-gt-2-0l-for-kia-forte-koup-2-0l-2015-2016-soul-forte-2-0-l-g4nc-engine-14-16-replace-24370-2e200-24350-2e200","title":"Timing Chain Kit w\/ CVVT Gear Hyundai Elantra Kia Forte 2.0L G4NC OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — Open box, item is untested, appears to have been potentially installed prior\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — item is untested and appears to have been potentially installed prior. Please review all photos and fitment details carefully before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis timing chain kit with CVVT gears is designed for the 2.0L G4NC engine found in select Hyundai Elantra and Kia Forte models. The timing chain is the critical valve-train component that synchronizes the crankshaft and camshafts, ensuring engine valves open and close at precisely the right moments for efficient combustion. This kit includes both the intake and exhaust CVVT (Continuously Variable Valve Timing) camshaft gears along with all associated chain hardware, making it a comprehensive replacement solution. Components are constructed from high-quality metal and plastic to meet OEM standards and are designed for direct bolt-on installation without modification.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFitment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2014–2016 Hyundai Elantra 2.0L (1999cc) L4 DOHC\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2014–2016 Hyundai Elantra GT 2.0L (1999cc) L4 DOHC\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2014–2016 Kia Forte 2.0L\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2014–2016 Kia Forte Koup 2.0L\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2014–2016 Kia Soul 2.0L\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEngine Code: G4NC\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1× Intake CVVT Gear — 24350-2E200\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1× Exhaust CVVT Gear — 24370-2E000\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1× Timing Chain — 24321-2E200\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1× Timing Chain Tensioner — 24410-2E000\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1× Tensioner Arm — 24420-2E000\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1× Timing Chain Guide Rail — 24430-2E000\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs \u0026amp; Cross-Reference Part Numbers\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEngine: 2.0L G4NC, 1999cc, L4 DOHC\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOEM-equivalent fitment; no modification required\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReplaces: 24321-2E200, 24370-2E200, 24350-2E200, 24350-2E201, 24410-2E000, 24420-2E200, 24430-2E000, 24430-2J000\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is an open-box unit that is untested and shows signs it may have been previously installed. Hardware appears present based on photos; however, buyers should inspect all components upon receipt and verify part numbers and vehicle fitment before installation. We recommend having a qualified technician evaluate the parts prior to use. Sold as-is.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"zuverlass","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46656249200875,"sku":"LPNO341548081","price":45.61,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/Untitled_design_67_eeccd7e2-fc1c-4e60-866b-8bf9e17b006a.png?v=1755063875"},{"product_id":"kichler-inch-light-outdoor-wall-sconce-black-745d","title":"Kichler Cylinders 15\" 2-Light Outdoor Wall Sconce in Black – Durable and Stylish Lighting Solution","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used – Good\u003cbr\u003eThis Kichler Cylinders 15\" 2-Light Outdoor Wall Sconce in Black is in good used condition. It has minor glue residue on the mount but shows no other visible damage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Kichler Cylinders 15\" 2-Light Outdoor Wall Sconce in Black adds bold, modern lighting to your exterior. Its clean, simple cylinder shape gives your home a stylish and updated look. The black finish enhances most surfaces. This sconce is perfect for contemporary spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYou will enjoy both upward and downward light, which brightens patios, porches, and walkways evenly. Light reaches both above and below, adding charm and better visibility. Its 15-inch height and 5.75-inch width offer coverage without being overpowering. Walls and entryways benefit from this balanced design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis wall sconce is made from strong aluminum with a weather-resistant finish. It withstands rain, wind, and sun when installed in covered locations. You get the durability and reliability you need for year-round outdoor use. The black coating resists fading and scratches over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe fixture uses two E26 sockets. Compatible bulbs are standard BR40 up to 120 watts each. Choose the brightness you want, whether for security, ambiance, or both. Bulbs are not included, so you can decide on LED or incandescent. The dual-bulb setup gives a decorative touch in addition to lighting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation is simple for most homeowners with electrical experience. This fixture is hardwired to your existing junction box. It is UL listed for damp locations, which means it is safe under covered patios or porches, but should not be placed where rain hits directly. The design allows you to mount it facing up or down. Choose whichever suits your lighting goals best.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCleaning the sconce is straightforward. Wipe with a soft, damp cloth to keep dust and dirt away. No harsh cleaners or frequent upkeep is needed. Quality construction provides years of service with very little maintenance required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis sconce works in many settings. Use it by garage doors, in courtyards, or at back entries for security and style. It blends well with both modern and traditional architecture. Its contemporary look and versatile shape suit many homes and commercial spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKichler is a respected brand known for innovative, dependable lighting solutions. For more details and installation guides, see their \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.kichler.com\/\" target=\"_blank\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eofficial website\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What type of bulbs does this sconce require?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The sconce accepts two BR40 bulbs with E26 bases, supporting up to 120 watts each. You are free to use either LED or incandescent bulbs. This allows you to select your preferred brightness or color temperature. Since bulbs are not included, you can choose more energy-efficient options or maximize luminosity for safety. Using your own bulbs gives you more control over your outdoor lighting.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this fixture suitable for wet locations?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The fixture is UL listed for damp locations. This means it works well in covered outdoor areas that may get some moisture. Think of covered porches or patios. It is not meant for areas where rain or direct water will constantly make contact. Using it under eaves or awnings helps ensure long life and safe operation. For fully exposed or very wet spots, consider a fixture rated for direct wet conditions.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can the sconce be installed with the light facing downward?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, you can install the sconce so the light shines either upwards or downwards. Some homeowners prefer upward light for highlighting architecture, while others want the light facing down for pathways or entrances. The flexible mounting allows you to choose the best direction for your needs and space. Orientation does not affect durability or safety.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What type of bulbs does this sconce require?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The sconce accepts two BR40 bulbs with E26 bases, supporting up to 120 watts each. You are free to use either LED or incandescent bulbs. This allows you to select your preferred brightness or color temperature. Since bulbs are not included, you can choose more energy-efficient options or maximize luminosity for safety. Using your own bulbs gives you more control over your outdoor lighting.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is this fixture suitable for wet locations?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The fixture is UL listed for damp locations. This means it works well in covered outdoor areas that may get some moisture. Think of covered porches or patios. It is not meant for areas where rain or direct water will constantly make contact. Using it under eaves or awnings helps ensure long life and safe operation. For fully exposed or very wet spots, consider a fixture rated for direct wet conditions.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can the sconce be installed with the light facing downward?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, you can install the sconce so the light shines either upwards or downwards. Some homeowners prefer upward light for highlighting architecture, while others want the light facing down for pathways or entrances. The flexible mounting allows you to choose the best direction for your needs and space. Orientation does not affect durability or safety.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf you want a reliable, modern outdoor light, this Kichler wall sconce is a smart investment. It brightens your space, adds safety, and lifts your home's curb appeal. Whether you are updating an entryway or outfitting a new construction, it delivers both style and substance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eReady to find more lighting like this? See our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eHome Collection\u003c\/a\u003e for other outdoor options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Kichler, outdoor, wall, sconce\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Kichler","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47003168506091,"sku":"LPNO373732903","price":27.54,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/31uYDxDGnZL._AC_SL1000.jpg?v=1761703551"},{"product_id":"haidms-matte-black-door-knobs-2a5c","title":"Haidms Matte Black Door Knobs Interior Privacy – Heavy Duty Square Design for Be","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Item appears to be slightly used and missing screws for one doorknob.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. Some signs of use present. One doorknob is missing screws.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your space with Haidms Matte Black Door Knobs. These privacy knobs combine modern style and long-lasting function. Their heavy-duty, square design fits bedrooms and bathrooms perfectly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe door knobs feature a matte black finish. This look is sleek and fits today’s interior trends. Their finish blends well with many décor styles. From minimal to rustic, these knobs elevate your space. The sturdy, zinc alloy body keeps each knob resistant to daily wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnjoy the practical benefits offered by these privacy door knobs. Each knob locks from the inside with a push button. In an emergency, use a pin from the outside to unlock. This safety feature offers peace of mind. It is ideal for bedrooms, guest rooms, and bathrooms, where privacy matters most.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation is simple and convenient. These knobs fit doors between 1-3\/8 inches and 1-3\/4 inches thick. You get an adjustable latch for either a 2-3\/8 inch or 2-3\/4 inch backset. This ensures most standard doors are compatible. All mounting parts are included, though one doorknob does not have screws due to the used condition. Basic tools are all you need to install. Some customers use these knobs during remodels, rentals, or new home projects. Many find them quick to install in less than ten minutes per door.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe matte finish helps resist fingerprints and smudges. Your hardware stays looking fresh with less effort. The zinc alloy is corrosion-resistant. It is ideal for humid environments like bathrooms. Daily use won’t wear them down. Enjoy a durable option that will last through busy schedules and households.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis five pack meets the needs of most homes. Use them for matching sets in hallways, master suites, or kid’s rooms. Large families or property managers often purchase multiple sets. For a select few, these knobs have even been used to create custom closet doors. Their consistent square shape makes them easy to align and install throughout your property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy choose Haidms?\u003c\/strong\u003e The Haidms brand produces products that focus on both design and function. These knobs are reliable and stylish. Their attention to detail makes them a trusted choice for homeowners, renovators, and do-it-yourselfers. To learn more about doorknob construction and materials, see the comprehensive breakdown at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Door_hardware\"\u003eWikipedia’s Door Hardware page\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these knobs reversible for left-handed and right-handed doors?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e These Haidms Matte Black Door Knobs are fully reversible. This quality allows you to install them on either left or right-handed doors. There is no special adjustment required. Simply follow the provided instructions in the box, making installation easy no matter the door’s orientation. Both left-swing and right-swing doors will be compatible. Many homeowners find this versatility convenient when upgrading multiple rooms.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What items are included with each set of door knobs?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Each package contains five matte black door knobs, five latches, and five strike plates. You also receive screws and the necessary mounting hardware for four of the knobs. Due to the used-good condition, one knob is missing its screws. It is possible to find replacement screws at most hardware stores if needed. Detailed instructions guide you through each installation step. With all major parts in the set, you have what you need for quick upgrades.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I use these knobs on exterior doors such as front or back entrances?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Haidms Matte Black Door Knobs are designed for interior privacy only. They do not offer the high security required for exterior entrances. Using them outside may lead to premature wear because weather and moisture can affect indoor hardware. If you need knobs for front or exterior doors, choose a product rated for outside use, ideally with security features. For bedrooms, bathrooms, or other indoor spaces, these knobs are a perfect fit.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these knobs reversible for left-handed and right-handed doors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"These Haidms Matte Black Door Knobs are fully reversible. This quality allows you to install them on either left or right-handed doors. There is no special adjustment required. Simply follow the provided instructions in the box, making installation easy no matter the door’s orientation. Both left-swing and right-swing doors will be compatible. Many homeowners find this versatility convenient when upgrading multiple rooms.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What items are included with each set of door knobs?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Each package contains five matte black door knobs, five latches, and five strike plates. You also receive screws and the necessary mounting hardware for four of the knobs. Due to the used-good condition, one knob is missing its screws. It is possible to find replacement screws at most hardware stores if needed. Detailed instructions guide you through each installation step. With all major parts in the set, you have what you need for quick upgrades.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I use these knobs on exterior doors such as front or back entrances?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Haidms Matte Black Door Knobs are designed for interior privacy only. They do not offer the high security required for exterior entrances. Using them outside may lead to premature wear because weather and moisture can affect indoor hardware. If you need knobs for front or exterior doors, choose a product rated for outside use, ideally with security features. For bedrooms, bathrooms, or other indoor spaces, these knobs are a perfect fit.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoosing the right hardware is important. These knobs help modernize rooms, boost privacy, and keep your space secure. Many customers notice the quality difference and appreciate the simple and sturdy feel right out of the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf you need matching hardware for other rooms, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003esee our Home Collection\u003c\/a\u003e for coordinating options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: door, knobs, privacy, interior\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Haidms","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47012148117739,"sku":"LPNO394991190","price":19.24,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61ffMF5H7CL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1761796338"},{"product_id":"stage-post-surgery-faja-2f3e","title":"Stage 1 Post-Surgery Colombian Faja - Medium Black Compression Garment for BBL, Lipo360, and Tummy Tuck Recovery","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good\u003cbr\u003eItem appears to be slightly used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stage 1 Post-Surgery Colombian Faja is an essential compression garment designed to support recovery after procedures like BBL, Lipo360, and tummy tucks. Crafted from a proprietary blend of 74% polyamide and 26% spandex, it offers gentle yet consistent compression to reduce swelling and promote healing. The soft, breathable fabric ensures comfort during extended wear, making it suitable for the critical post-operative period. ([ubuy.co.za](https:\/\/www.ubuy.co.za\/product\/JAX0DSWA4-stage-1-post-surgery-colombian-faja-compression-garment-for-recovery-after-bbl-lipo360-tummytucks-faja-moldeadora-reductora?srsltid=AfmBOop3ndfgXK4vfmZDv1ojVPrRJ9ywKr1b1eWOYnSeWNYhwPKaQ0cx\u0026amp;utm_source=openai))\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis faja features adjustable shoulder straps and multiple rows of hooks, allowing for a customizable fit as your body changes during recovery. The design includes double compression on the abdomen and waist for effective tummy control, while providing support to the hips and buttocks to enhance your natural curves. Flat seams make it easy to conceal under regular clothing, and the open crotch design facilitates convenient bathroom access. ([ubuy.co.za](https:\/\/www.ubuy.co.za\/product\/JAX0DSWA4-stage-1-post-surgery-colombian-faja-compression-garment-for-recovery-after-bbl-lipo360-tummytucks-faja-moldeadora-reductora?srsltid=AfmBOop3ndfgXK4vfmZDv1ojVPrRJ9ywKr1b1eWOYnSeWNYhwPKaQ0cx\u0026amp;utm_source=openai))\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned specifically for Stage 1 post-surgical recovery, this garment offers mild to moderate compression with a thinner, softer fabric to accommodate high sensitivity and swelling immediately after surgery. The goal is to decrease inflammation and fluid retention without compromising comfort. As swelling subsides, the adjustable features allow you to maintain appropriate compression levels throughout your healing journey. ([ubuy.co.za](https:\/\/www.ubuy.co.za\/product\/JAX0DSWA4-stage-1-post-surgery-colombian-faja-compression-garment-for-recovery-after-bbl-lipo360-tummytucks-faja-moldeadora-reductora?srsltid=AfmBOop3ndfgXK4vfmZDv1ojVPrRJ9ywKr1b1eWOYnSeWNYhwPKaQ0cx\u0026amp;utm_source=openai))\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eManufactured by Lipo Express, a Colombian company with decades of experience in post-surgical recovery, this faja is part of a comprehensive line of products designed to meet your recovery needs. Whether you're recovering from a BBL, Lipo360, or tummy tuck, this garment is tailored to support your healing process effectively. ([ubuy.co.za](https:\/\/www.ubuy.co.za\/product\/JAX0DSWA4-stage-1-post-surgery-colombian-faja-compression-garment-for-recovery-after-bbl-lipo360-tummytucks-faja-moldeadora-reductora?srsltid=AfmBOop3ndfgXK4vfmZDv1ojVPrRJ9ywKr1b1eWOYnSeWNYhwPKaQ0cx\u0026amp;utm_source=openai))\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlease refer to the provided size chart when selecting your size, as these compression garments are designed to fit snugly and may appear smaller than standard clothing. The highly elastic fabric will stretch to fit, and it's normal to exert some effort when closing the garment for the first time. If you have any sizing questions, feel free to reach out for personalized guidance. ([ubuy.co.za](https:\/\/www.ubuy.co.za\/product\/JAX0DSWA4-stage-1-post-surgery-colombian-faja-compression-garment-for-recovery-after-bbl-lipo360-tummytucks-faja-moldeadora-reductora?srsltid=AfmBOop3ndfgXK4vfmZDv1ojVPrRJ9ywKr1b1eWOYnSeWNYhwPKaQ0cx\u0026amp;utm_source=openai))\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How does this faja assist in post-surgical recovery? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stage 1 Post-Surgery Colombian Faja provides gentle compression to reduce swelling and promote blood circulation, which are crucial for healing after procedures like BBL, Lipo360, and tummy tucks. The compression stabilizes surgical areas, minimizes fluid retention, and helps maintain the body's new shape during recovery. ([ubuy.co.za](https:\/\/www.ubuy.co.za\/product\/JAX0DSWA4-stage-1-post-surgery-colombian-faja-compression-garment-for-recovery-after-bbl-lipo360-tummytucks-faja-moldeadora-reductora?srsltid=AfmBOop3ndfgXK4vfmZDv1ojVPrRJ9ywKr1b1eWOYnSeWNYhwPKaQ0cx\u0026amp;utm_source=openai))\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I wear this faja under regular clothing? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, the faja is designed with flat seams and a discreet profile, making it easy to wear under regular clothing without being noticeable. This allows you to continue your daily activities comfortably while receiving the necessary support during your recovery. ([ubuy.co.za](https:\/\/www.ubuy.co.za\/product\/JAX0DSWA4-stage-1-post-surgery-colombian-faja-compression-garment-for-recovery-after-bbl-lipo360-tummytucks-faja-moldeadora-reductora?srsltid=AfmBOop3ndfgXK4vfmZDv1ojVPrRJ9ywKr1b1eWOYnSeWNYhwPKaQ0cx\u0026amp;utm_source=openai))\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I choose the correct size for this faja? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e It's important to refer to the size chart provided by the manufacturer, as these compression garments are designed to fit snugly and may appear smaller than standard clothing. Measure your waist and hips accurately, and if you have any questions, reach out for personalized sizing guidance. ([ubuy.co.za](https:\/\/www.ubuy.co.za\/product\/JAX0DSWA4-stage-1-post-surgery-colombian-faja-compression-garment-for-recovery-after-bbl-lipo360-tummytucks-faja-moldeadora-reductora?srsltid=AfmBOop3ndfgXK4vfmZDv1ojVPrRJ9ywKr1b1eWOYnSeWNYhwPKaQ0cx\u0026amp;utm_source=openai))\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn summary, the Stage 1 Post-Surgery Colombian Faja is a meticulously designed compression garment that offers the necessary support and comfort during the initial stages of recovery from procedures like BBL, Lipo360, and tummy tucks. Its thoughtful features and high-quality materials make it an invaluable aid in your healing journey. ([ubuy.co.za](https:\/\/www.ubuy.co.za\/product\/JAX0DSWA4-stage-1-post-surgery-colombian-faja-compression-garment-for-recovery-after-bbl-lipo360-tummytucks-faja-moldeadora-reductora?srsltid=AfmBOop3ndfgXK4vfmZDv1ojVPrRJ9ywKr1b1eWOYnSeWNYhwPKaQ0cx\u0026amp;utm_source=openai))\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more information on post-surgical compression garments, you can visit the manufacturer's website.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\"\u003eExplore our personal-care Collection\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: faja, compression, recovery, garment\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lipo Express","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47038844436715,"sku":"LPNO381235376","price":37.61,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71fPWrjLl3L._AC_SX569.jpg?v=1762492227"},{"product_id":"kohler-ts14423-valve-trim-881f","title":"Kohler TS14423-3-SN Purist Rite-Temp Valve Trim with Cross Handle - Vibrant Polished Nickel","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good.\u003cbr\u003eThis Kohler TS14423-3-SN Purist Rite-Temp Valve Trim with Cross Handle in Vibrant Polished Nickel blends modern design with durable performance. It is the perfect accent for contemporary bathrooms, offering function and style.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe valve trim features a simple cross handle. This allows for easy temperature and water flow adjustments. The solid metal build gives lasting quality. The Vibrant Polished Nickel finish is engineered to resist tarnish and corrosion, keeping a high-shine look for years. With gentle curves and a minimal profile, this trim fits easily into many bathroom themes from sleek modern to understated luxury.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis product is part of the Kohler Purist collection, which is well-known for clean lines and architectural form. Designers and homeowners choose Purist for the freedom to mix and match. You can coordinate the TS14423-3-SN with matching faucets and accessories. Browse mirrors, towel bars, and other Purist items for a unified space. Its universal aesthetic is ideal for both remodels and new builds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation requires a separate Rite-Temp pressure-balancing valve. This ensures the shower temperature stays within three degrees of your setting, even as house water pressure changes. The included faceplate and cross handle streamline the process and eliminate confusion. Most DIYers find these components simple to assemble with clear instructions provided by Kohler.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe ergonomic cross handle is unique. It offers a secure grip for all ages. Adjusting temperature or water flow is smooth. This design suits households of many types, from busy families to hospitality settings. The finish is easy to clean—just wipe with a soft, damp cloth for daily care. For more details on maintenance, visit Kohler’s cleaning guide linked in the FAQ section below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA great trim set elevates your entire shower. The Purist Rite-Temp line goes beyond looks. It safeguards you and your family with constant, comfortable water temperature control. For bathroom projects big or small, this Kohler trim saves you from performance or compatibility issues. It matches well with most Kohler Rite-Temp valves, including popular models like the K-304 Series. Always check your valve model first or ask a professional for advice on compatibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis valve trim has become a favorite for builders and homeowners looking to balance value, style, and reliability. Its enduring finish resists fingerprints and water spots. The intuitive handle suits daily routines and saves time with every shower. Consider integrating the Purist collection in other bathroom zones for design consistency. Explore more \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eHome Collection\u003c\/a\u003e ideas to match this look.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is included with the Kohler TS14423-3-SN valve trim?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The package includes the cross handle and the decorative faceplate. It does not include the required Rite-Temp pressure-balancing valve itself. That needs to be purchased separately. This design lets you select the right valve for your project, but be sure to confirm compatibility before purchase. Both novice and experienced installers can follow the detailed instructions provided by Kohler.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this Kohler valve trim compatible with all Rite-Temp valves?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This trim is mainly designed for Kohler Rite-Temp valves, like the K-304\/K-P304 and K-8304\/K-P8304 series. These are some of the most common valves for showers today. Before you buy, check which valve is already installed in your plumbing or have a pro check for you. Using the correct valve will ensure smooth operation and a perfect fit.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How can I keep the Vibrant Polished Nickel finish looking great?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e To protect the high-gloss finish, clean regularly with a damp cloth. Avoid harsh chemicals or abrasive pads as these can scratch or dull the metal. For tougher spots, use mild, soapy water and rinse well. Kohler offers more care details in their official cleaning guides. This helps your trim look new for years. Visit \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.kohler.com\/en\/browse\/bathroom-resources\/cleaning-and-care-guides\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eKohler Cleaning Guide\u003c\/a\u003e for tips.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is included with the Kohler TS14423-3-SN valve trim?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The package includes the cross handle and the decorative faceplate. It does not include the required Rite-Temp pressure-balancing valve itself. That needs to be purchased separately. This design lets you select the right valve for your project, but be sure to confirm compatibility before purchase. Both novice and experienced installers can follow the detailed instructions provided by Kohler.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is this Kohler valve trim compatible with all Rite-Temp valves?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This trim is mainly designed for Kohler Rite-Temp valves, like the K-304\/K-P304 and K-8304\/K-P8304 series. These are some of the most common valves for showers today. Before you buy, check which valve is already installed in your plumbing or have a pro check for you. Using the correct valve will ensure smooth operation and a perfect fit.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How can I keep the Vibrant Polished Nickel finish looking great?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"To protect the high-gloss finish, clean regularly with a damp cloth. Avoid harsh chemicals or abrasive pads as these can scratch or dull the metal. For tougher spots, use mild, soapy water and rinse well. Kohler offers more care details in their official cleaning guides. This helps your trim look new for years. Visit https:\/\/www.kohler.com\/en\/browse\/bathroom-resources\/cleaning-and-care-guides for tips.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor official specifications and advanced product details, visit the Kohler TS14423-3-SN Purist Rite-Temp Valve Trim \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.kohler.com\/en\/products\/bathroom\/bathroom-faucets\/shower-faucets\/purist-rite-temp-valve-trim-with-cross-handle-ts14423-3-sn\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eKohler TS14423-3-SN Product Page\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Kohler, valve, trim, Purist, Rite-Temp.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Kohler","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47038882644203,"sku":"LPNO397989867","price":134.73,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/IMG_5395_0fbfa60f-0bef-4f6f-a29b-b6be69b2f1ab.jpg?v=1762494961"},{"product_id":"goldenwarm-gold-door-handles-pack-da44","title":"goldenwarm Gold Door Handles Interior - 4 Pack","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. These gold door handles come in B condition, with minor signs of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your home's look with the goldenwarm Gold Door Handles Interior 4 Pack. These privacy brushed \u003cstrong\u003ebrass\u003c\/strong\u003e levers offer security for bedrooms and bathrooms. Their brushed gold finish provides a sleek, elegant appeal while also resisting fingerprints. Perfect for home improvement projects where you want style and functionality in one package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCrafted from strong zinc alloy, these handles offer reliability. The gold brushed finish protects against scratches and adds a premium feel. Reversible levers fit both right-handed and left-handed doors. This makes installation flexible across different rooms. The ergonomic design ensures every grip feels comfortable yet secure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe goldenwarm set stands out for its ease of installation. You just need a Philips or flat-head screwdriver. No drilling or special tools required. The handles use your door's existing holes, reducing effort and mess. Adjustable latches support both 2 3\/8\" and 2 3\/4\" backsets, working with 1 3\/8\"-1 3\/4\" thick doors. This broad compatibility makes them suitable for nearly every standard interior door, whether it's for a modern home or a classic renovation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe privacy function matters most in bedrooms and bathrooms. The integrated push-button lock offers easy security from inside the room. Haven't installed privacy handles before? Don't worry. Each pack comes with clear instructions. An emergency release slot allows for quick access from the outside if needed, which is ideal for family homes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese door handles not only perform but also look impressive. The beautiful gold finish matches many popular fixtures, from drawer pulls to light switches. Whether in matte black, bronze, or another brushed metal, gold accents create a luxury touch. The color coordinates well with many design palettes, from Scandinavian to transitional styles. If you're updating several rooms, order more packs for a cohesive look throughout the home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDurability ensures you won't need frequent replacements. Zinc alloy resists rust and wear, while the smooth lever action stays consistent over time. These handles are a quality choice for those who want upgrades that last through daily use. They're also easy to clean—just wipe with a damp cloth to remove smudges or debris.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBy choosing goldenwarm, you trust a brand known for reliable hardware. They offer door levers, cabinet pulls, and more. For further reading on handle design and engineering, you may find this Wikipedia article on \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" rel=\"noopener\" href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Door_handle\" target=\"_blank\"\u003edoor handles\u003c\/a\u003e helpful.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse all our \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\"\u003ehome collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more matching hardware and inspiration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I install these handles on both right-handed and left-handed doors? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e These goldenwarm gold door handles are made for maximum flexibility. Each handle uses a reversible lever design. This means you can fit them on both right-handed and left-handed doors. Whether you're remodeling or starting new construction, there's no need to buy separate models. No complicated steps—just install as usual. The mechanism remains smooth and secure on either side of the door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these handles easy to set up, and what tools will I need? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Installation is straightforward, even for first-timers. You just need a screwdriver and about 10 minutes per handle. The hardware can be attached using the standard holes already in most doors. No extra parts are needed. Every pack includes step-by-step instructions. If you get stuck, support is available online. This set is perfect for quick home improvement upgrades or larger installations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e I want extra security—are these suitable for exterior doors? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This set is designed for indoor use, with a focus on privacy and visual appeal. They are ideal for bedrooms, bathrooms, and closets. For outside doors, such as your front or back entry, choose hardware made specifically for exterior use. Exterior options have additional weatherproofing and stronger locking features to ensure maximum security. Visit the manufacturer or look for outdoor-rated hardware for those needs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will the gold finish stay bright over time, and how should I clean them? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The high-quality brushed gold finish is engineered to last. The surface resists tarnishing and fingerprints. To keep them bright, clean gently with a soft, damp cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaners. This preserves their sheen and prevents scratches. For busy homes or high-traffic areas, this touch of care maintains their appearance for years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor those who value reliable and stylish \u003cstrong\u003ehandles\u003c\/strong\u003e, this goldenwarm Gold Door Handles Interior 4 Pack blends security and design. Perfect for modern and classic homes alike. They come from a trusted name in \u003cstrong\u003edoor\u003c\/strong\u003e hardware. For more options, check out our \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\"\u003ehome collection\u003c\/a\u003e today.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHandles, brass, gold, door\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"goldenwarm","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47039195381995,"sku":"LPNO397978216","price":71.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61u9l4zyejL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762504177"},{"product_id":"thule-kit-186117-d070","title":"Thule Kit 186117 - Custom Fit Roof Rack Kit for Flush Railings","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. This Thule Kit 186117 is in B Condition. It shows slight use. The instruction manual is missing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Thule Kit 186117 is a custom fit kit for vehicles with flush railings. It creates a secure base for your Thule roof rack. You get reliability and stability for all types of cargo. \u003cstrong\u003eRoof\u003c\/strong\u003e is the core keyword for this product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis kit includes four rubber-coated steel clips with matching pads. Each part is crafted for your specific vehicle. Pads help the clips fit snug against the flush railings. Installation does not scratch or damage the roof. The kit works with the Thule Evo Flush Rail and Edge Flush Rail foot packs. Every component is made to meet high quality standards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis \u003cstrong\u003efit\u003c\/strong\u003e kit is compatible with various vehicle models. It fits popular options like the Cadillac Escalade (2021+), Chevrolet Suburban (2021+), and GMC Yukon (2021+). If you have a different vehicle, check Thule’s \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.thule.com\/en-us\/roof-rack\/fit-kits-and-clamps\/kit-186117-_-186117\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eofficial fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e for more details.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEasy installation is one of this kit’s strong points. Just follow the model-specific instructions. Most people can install it at home using basic tools. Take care to plan ahead if the manual is missing. Video instructions and PDF guides are online. Once attached, the \u003cstrong\u003ekit\u003c\/strong\u003e supports Thule load bars and many accessories. This helps you safely carry bikes, roof boxes, or other gear for work or adventure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDurability matters. This kit is made in Sweden and tested for long-lasting performance. Steel clips resist corrosion. Pads remain strong in rain, heat, or cold. You can depend on this kit year after year in any season.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor those who value both looks and function, the Thule Kit 186117 is ideal. Sleek contours blend in with your vehicle’s flush railings. You get a secure roof rack, but with no bulky or awkward fittings. That means greater style and enhanced utility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis \u003cstrong\u003eRoof\u003c\/strong\u003e rack kit increases cargo space without risking safety. Everything fits tightly to prevent shifting while you drive. Use it for ski trips, camping, or just moving extra bags. Save room inside your car by securing items safely up top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about future needs? With a Thule flush rail kit, you can easily swap out rack accessories. Use a cargo box for winter. Try a kayak mount for summer. The system adapts to your changing plans as your activities change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the Thule Kit 186117 compatible with vehicles not listed above?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Kit 186117 is crafted for specific models such as Cadillac Escalade, Chevrolet Suburban, and GMC Yukon (all from 2021 onwards). It may not fit other vehicles properly. Each Thule fit kit is shaped exactly for certain cars. If your vehicle is not listed, please visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.thule.com\/en-us\/roof-rack\/fit-kits-and-clamps\/kit-186117-_-186117\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eofficial Thule Fit Guide\u003c\/a\u003e. Accurate fit is vital for safety and performance. The wrong kit can cause damage or unsafe mounting. Always double-check fit before trying installation.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I install the Thule Kit 186117 myself, or do I need a professional?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, most people can install this fit kit themselves. You only need basic tools and patience. Start by reviewing available video guides if the written instructions are missing. Clean your roof before you begin. Most steps are clear and do not take too much time. However, if you are uncomfortable or unsure, a professional can finish installation quickly. This also ensures that everything is tight and safe before you hit the road.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the maximum weight I can carry using the Thule Kit 186117?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e When you use this kit with the correct Thule bars and feet, the maximum load is 75 kg (165 lbs). Do not exceed this weight. Remember to count the rack, bars, and every accessory as part of the total. Too much weight can harm your car or create a hazard for other drivers. Always distribute cargo evenly. Regularly check the tightness of all connections. Stick to posted limits for safety and the best lifespan for yourThule kit.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Why should I choose the Thule Kit 186117 for my roof?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Thule is known for durability and smart design. This \u003cstrong\u003eroof\u003c\/strong\u003e rack kit fits quickly, holds tight, and looks great. It gives you flexibility for every trip. Investing in a Thule fit kit helps you travel with more gear and less worry. You gain extra cargo room without sacrificing your car’s appearance or safety.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is the Thule Kit 186117 compatible with vehicles not listed above?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Kit 186117 is crafted for specific models such as Cadillac Escalade, Chevrolet Suburban, and GMC Yukon (all from 2021 onwards). It may not fit other vehicles properly. Each Thule fit kit is shaped exactly for certain cars. If your vehicle is not listed, please visit the official Thule Fit Guide. Accurate fit is vital for safety and performance. The wrong kit can cause damage or unsafe mounting. Always double-check fit before trying installation.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I install the Thule Kit 186117 myself, or do I need a professional?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, most people can install this fit kit themselves. You only need basic tools and patience. Start by reviewing available video guides if the written instructions are missing. Clean your roof before you begin. Most steps are clear and do not take too much time. However, if you are uncomfortable or unsure, a professional can finish installation quickly. This also ensures that everything is tight and safe before you hit the road.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the maximum weight I can carry using the Thule Kit 186117?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"When you use this kit with the correct Thule bars and feet, the maximum load is 75 kg (165 lbs). Do not exceed this weight. Remember to count the rack, bars, and every accessory as part of the total. Too much weight can harm your car or create a hazard for other drivers. Always distribute cargo evenly. Regularly check the tightness of all connections. Stick to posted limits for safety and the best lifespan for your Thule kit.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Why should I choose the Thule Kit 186117 for my roof?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Thule is known for durability and smart design. This roof rack kit fits quickly, holds tight, and looks great. It gives you flexibility for every trip. Investing in a Thule fit kit helps you travel with more gear and less worry. You gain extra cargo room without sacrificing your car’s appearance or safety.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis Thule Kit 186117 offers a solid option for anyone needing more cargo space. It lets you seize road trip opportunities, outdoor events, or move big items with ease. Review your vehicle’s compatibility, gather tools, and you can install the kit in an afternoon. Strong, safe, and dependable—this kit is ready to boost your vehicle’s capacity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eAutomotive Collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more roof rack solutions and other vehicle accessories. Each product helps support your adventures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor more details about Thule’s products, engineering, and brand heritage, visit \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Thule_Group\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eThule’s Wikipedia page\u003c\/a\u003e. There you can learn about their innovation in \u003cstrong\u003eroof\u003c\/strong\u003e racks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFind the right \u003cstrong\u003eroof\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003ekit\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003efit\u003c\/strong\u003e for your next journey. Browse, compare, and prepare for anything. Roof, kit, fit, Thule.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Thule","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47050873798891,"sku":"LPNO375846286","price":104.31,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/51i7hmyxVKL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762826095"},{"product_id":"brother-dr229cl-drum-unit-cf25","title":"Brother Genuine DR229CL Drum Unit - High-Yield, Reliable Performance","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. One ink cartridge appears slightly used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Brother Genuine DR229CL Drum Unit keeps your Brother printer running at its best. It delivers crisp, clear pages every time. Designed for top performance, this drum unit suits both homes and busy offices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis drum unit stands out for its \u003cstrong\u003ehigh-yield\u003c\/strong\u003e capacity. It can produce up to 30,000 pages before needing a replacement. This helps reduce interruptions and cuts your overall printing costs. You get more pages for your investment, making it ideal for offices with frequent print needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCompatibility is broad. The DR229CL works with popular Brother models. These include the HL-L3220CDW and MFC-L3720CDW. If you have other models like HL-L3300CDW or MFC-L8395CDW, it is likely compatible too. Always double-check your model to ensure the right fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReliable \u003c\/strong\u003e performance is key with this unit. Toner is distributed evenly on every print. This helps prevent smudges and gives professional-looking documents. Whether you print reports, graphics, or everyday files, results always look clean.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDurability and efficiency are major strengths. The DR229CL uses quality materials for a long lifespan. Each print is sharp from the first page to the last. Easy installation means you keep printing with minimal downtime. Instructions are simple, so no professional help is needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrother values sustainability. When your drum unit is empty, return it through the Brother recycling program at no cost. This helps keep printers working well and reduces waste. Learn how to recycle your used drum unit by visiting \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.brother-usa.com\/environment\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eBrother’s official site\u003c\/a\u003e for more details. This helps protect the environment and supports responsible printing practices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eRegular maintenance helps ensure the best output. Check your prints often. If quality drops, replace the drum unit or perform basic cleaning. Read your printer’s user guide for more tips on getting the most from your drum unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow the Brother DR229CL Drum Unit Benefits Your Printer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis drum offers smooth operation from installation. Your printer gets a clean, seamless fit every time. Printing large batches of invoices, colored photos, or text is simple and trouble-free. The DR229CL is built for reliability and will not let you down when deadlines matter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAre you looking for \u003cstrong\u003eprinter\u003c\/strong\u003e supplies that last? The DR229CL is a smart choice for many users. It works well at home, in the classroom, or in the workplace. Use it for both black-and-white and color documents. Enjoy strong results on every page with less worry about replacements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the page yield of the Brother Genuine DR229CL Drum Unit?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The DR229CL can print up to 30,000 pages under standard conditions. Actual yield depends on use and printer settings. If you print heavy graphics, your yield may be less. For light text documents, expect closer to maximum output. High yield means you replace the drum less often, saving time and effort.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Which Brother printer models work with the DR229CL Drum Unit?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This drum unit fits several Brother printers. Some examples are HL-L3220CDW and MFC-L3720CDW. It also supports models like HL-L3280CDW and HL-L8245CDW. Always check your specific model before purchase to be sure it's correct for your device.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I recycle the used DR229CL drum unit?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Brother offers a free recycling program for used drums. To recycle, collect your empty unit and visit Brother's website for a prepaid shipping label. Follow simple instructions to send it back at no charge. Recycling helps reduce landfill waste and supports eco-friendly practices. For exact steps, see the manufacturer’s recycling program on their site.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What maintenance tips help the DR229CL last longer?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Check your printer's settings often and clean the inside carefully. Avoid touching the drum surface. Store unused drums in a cool, dry area, away from sunlight. Replace the drum when your printer tells you or when you notice print quality fading.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the page yield of the Brother Genuine DR229CL Drum Unit?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The DR229CL can print up to 30,000 pages under standard conditions. Actual yield depends on use and printer settings. If you print heavy graphics, your yield may be less. For light text documents, expect closer to maximum output. High yield means you replace the drum less often, saving time and effort.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Which Brother printer models work with the DR229CL Drum Unit?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This drum unit fits several Brother printers. Some examples are HL-L3220CDW and MFC-L3720CDW. It also supports models like HL-L3280CDW and HL-L8245CDW. Always check your specific model before purchase to be sure it's correct for your device.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I recycle the used DR229CL drum unit?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Brother offers a free recycling program for used drums. To recycle, collect your empty unit and visit Brother's website for a prepaid shipping label. Follow simple instructions to send it back at no charge. Recycling helps reduce landfill waste and supports eco-friendly practices. For exact steps, see the manufacturer’s recycling program on their site.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What maintenance tips help the DR229CL last longer?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Check your printer's settings often and clean the inside carefully. Avoid touching the drum surface. Store unused drums in a cool, dry area, away from sunlight. Replace the drum when your printer tells you or when you notice print quality fading.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn summary:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Brother Genuine DR229CL Drum Unit excels in performance and yield. It works reliably with many Brother printers. The unit is built to last and is easy to install. Plus, Brother’s recycling program makes it a more sustainable choice. For more information about drum units and related products, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/electronics\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eexplore our electronics collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTo see the official product specs and confirm fit compatibility, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.brother-usa.com\/products\/dr229cl\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\" target=\"_blank\"\u003evisit Brother’s official DR229CL page\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Brother, DR229CL, drum, printer\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Brother","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47050879828203,"sku":"LPNO344536775","price":132.04,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/717yaAgV4RL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762826751"},{"product_id":"sopsfr-inch-straight-lace-front-wig-3152","title":"SOPSFR 30 Inch Straight Lace Front Wig Human Hair - 200% Density, Pre-Plucked 13x6 HD Lace with Baby Hair","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good\u003cbr\u003eAppears to be used, good condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SOPSFR 30 Inch Straight Lace Front Wig offers a natural, sleek look with 200% density, pre-plucked hairline, and HD lace. Enjoy a full, luxurious style that blends easily with your skin and comes ready to customize to your liking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTransform your everyday style or complete a glamorous evening look with this premium human hair wig. \u003cstrong\u003eSOPSFR\u003c\/strong\u003e uses only 100% unprocessed human hair, giving you real shine, movement, and softness. The 30-inch straight silky hair can be straightened, curled, dyed, and bleached. With a length that turns heads, you can try simple ponytails or flowing styles. Each strand is securely attached to the lace, creating a look that mimics natural hair growth. The \u003ca rel=\"noopener\" style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Wig\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ehistory of wigs\u003c\/a\u003e shows how they help define fashion and personal style, making this investment both practical and stylish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnjoy worry-free wear thanks to the 13x6 HD lace front. This lace gives a deep parting space and a seamless hairline. The wig's pre-plucked design, complete with natural baby hair, lets you easily achieve realistic edges. HD transparent lace blends with many skin tones, reducing the need for extra makeup along the part. The medium cap features adjustable straps and combs for stability and comfort. Whether you have a smaller or larger head size, you’ll find a fit that feels secure and gentle all day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMaintenance is simple. Wash the wig with gentle shampoo, let it air dry, and protect it from excessive heat. Take care when dyeing or bleaching. For best results, see a salon professional. With the right care, this wig remains soft, tangle-free, and vibrant, giving you long-lasting beauty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe high density of 200% makes this wig extra thick and full. Compared to thinner wigs, you get more volume, body, and bounce. This added thickness helps the wig hold styles better and gives it a premium, luxurious look. Showcase straight styles for a polished finish or gentle waves for an everyday, effortless appearance. No matter how you wear it, you’ll look and feel confident.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSOPSFR Wig Benefits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e100% human hair for real look and feel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e30-inch straight length for dramatic style\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e200% density provides full, thick hair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-plucked, with baby hairs for realism\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e13x6 HD lace for versatile parting options\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMedium size cap (21.5-22.5 inches), can fit most heads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdjustable straps and secure combs keep it in place\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I dye, bleach, or style this wig?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This wig is made of 100% unprocessed human hair. You can dye, bleach, or style it with heat tools. However, for color changes or chemical processing, we recommend visiting a professional stylist. An expert can help you protect the hair and maintain its softness and shine. Too much heat or chemical use at home can cause shedding or dryness, so always use heat protectant and gentle products.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I keep the wig secure all day?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The included adjustable straps and inside combs give a snug, tight fit. For extra hold, consider using a wig grip band, wig glue, or adhesive tape. These methods are popular for longer wear or active days. Make sure to place the combs under your hair or wig cap for best hold. If you use glue, clean your scalp after use to avoid irritation. With secure attachment, you can enjoy the wig without slipping or moving, even while being active.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this HD lace suitable for different skin tones?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e HD transparent lace is designed to work well with many skin shades. It creates a melted, undetectable finish if installed properly. If you want a more customized look, you can lightly tint the lace or use foundation along the part. This step is useful for those with either very light or very dark skin tones, ensuring the lace blends perfectly with your complexion. HD lace is popular for cosplay, everyday wear, or big events since it looks natural under any lighting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What styles can I create with this wig?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The 13x6 parting space allows nearly endless styling options. You can create a center part, side part, deep wave, half-up, half-down, low bun, or high ponytail. The straight hair texture is easy to curl or wave with an iron. Because of the density and length, you can experiment with different volumes and shapes. This flexibility makes the SOPSFR wig a favorite for anyone who loves to change their look often.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the best way to care for this wig long term?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e For long-term quality, wash the wig every 1-2 weeks or as needed. Use sulfate-free, gentle shampoo and conditioner. Let it air dry on a wig stand, and store it away from sunlight. Avoid tugging when brushing. If you use heat, always apply a heat protectant. With these habits, the lace, hair, and cap will stay in top shape for months or years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your look with SOPSFR. This lace front wig blends style, comfort, and reliability. Discover more self-care essentials in our \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\"\u003epersonal-care Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeywords:\u003c\/strong\u003e SOPSFR, wig, lace, straight\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"SOPSFR","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47088225616107,"sku":"LPNO393699530","price":129.19,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71YGwlUN-iL._SL1000.jpg?v=1763615367"},{"product_id":"kingston-brass-kb325-bidet-faucet-61b3","title":"Kingston Brass KB325 Magellan 3-Handle Bidet Faucet with Brass Pop-Up, Oil Rubbed Bronze","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good\u003cbr\u003eSlightly used condition\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Kingston Brass KB325 Magellan 3-Handle Bidet Faucet offers durable brass construction with an oil rubbed bronze finish. Its ADA-compliant design and traditional style make it practical and elegant for any bathroom. Easy to use and reliable, this fixture enhances both comfort and hygiene for your daily routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your bathroom with the Kingston Brass KB325 Magellan Bidet Faucet. The classic oil rubbed bronze finish brings warmth and sophistication, while the solid brass body is built to last. This bidet faucet features three lever handles, giving you accurate control of water flow and temperature. Each handle is designed for easy accessibility and smooth operation. It’s great for all members of your household, regardless of age or ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned for optimal hygiene, this faucet produces a vertical spray for targeted cleansing. The matching pop-up drain completes the coordinated look. Installation is simple with a deck mount design and a standard 1\/2\" IPS connection. The dimensions—13.66\" length, 3.92\" width, 3.05\" height—fit most common bidet setups. Washerless cartridges deliver smooth, drip-free operation for daily peace of mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnjoy premium features and robust performance. The Kingston Brass KB325 provides a minimum spout flow rate of 1.5 GPM at 20 PSI. This ensures efficient, effective cleansing while conserving water. The durable oil rubbed bronze finish protects against corrosion and tarnishes. Your faucet will look beautiful for years to come. Routine maintenance is easy—just wipe gently to keep the bronze looking rich and attractive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis faucet is a versatile option for many bathroom styles. The Magellan collection adapts well to both classic and modern spaces. The timeless design works in compact powder rooms or larger, spa-inspired bathrooms. If you are replacing an old bidet faucet or equipping a new home, this Kingston Brass model brings confidence and reliability. The ADA compliance guarantees everyone can use the faucet with ease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKingston Brass is a trusted brand known for quality and customer satisfaction. They offer a full line of bathroom fixtures, so you can coordinate multiple pieces. Their faucets are popular in homes and professional renovations alike. For more technical details about brass faucets, visit \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Brass\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eWikipedia’s article on brass\u003c\/a\u003e for more information about this material’s benefits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLooking to match your fixtures? Explore our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/home\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ehome collection\u003c\/a\u003e for coordinating bidet and bath accessories. You’ll find more options in similar finishes and styles to complete your bathroom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eKey Features of the Kingston Brass KB325 Magellan Bidet Faucet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDurable solid brass body for long life and superior performance\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOil rubbed bronze finish resists corrosion, tarnish, and fingerprints\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThree easy-turn lever handles offer precise flow and temperature adjustments\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eComes with a matching pop-up drain for a unified bathroom look\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWasherless cartridge ensures long-lasting, smooth operation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eADA-compliant handles for accessibility and universal use\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis faucet offers peace of mind through excellent engineering and timeless style. It stands out for its ease of installation, user-friendly design, and dependable function. Many homeowners choose Kingston Brass for its blend of tradition and innovation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the flow rate of the Kingston Brass KB325 Magellan Bidet Faucet?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe faucet provides a minimum flow rate of 1.5 gallons per minute at 20 PSI. This means you receive effective water pressure for cleansing without wasting water. It offers the performance needed for bidet hygiene while helping conserve resources with every use.\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDoes the faucet come with a drain assembly?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes, the faucet includes a matching finish pop-up drain in the package. The drain assembly helps create a seamless look and makes installation easier. Coordinating the drain with the main faucet finishes the bathroom’s style. You won’t need to purchase an additional drain, so setup is quick and efficient.\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIs the faucet ADA compliant?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nAbsolutely, the three lever handles are crafted to meet ADA guidelines. This compliance means the faucet is usable by individuals with limited mobility or physical challenges. The handles are easy to grip and turn, making this faucet a thoughtful choice for multi-generational homes or shared spaces where accessibility matters.\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I maintain the oil rubbed bronze finish?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nTo keep your faucet looking fresh, wipe it regularly with a damp, soft cloth. Avoid abrasive cleaners or harsh chemicals, as these can damage the finish. Occasional light polishing with a non-abrasive cleaner helps retain its beautiful look. Proper maintenance keeps the surface clean and the color rich.\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCan I use this faucet with all bidet models?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThis faucet fits most standard bidet setups with a deck mount and 1\/2\" IPS connection. However, it is best to check the specifications of your particular fixture before installation. The compact design and adjustable handles suit many modern and classic bidet styles.\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the flow rate of the Kingston Brass KB325 Magellan Bidet Faucet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The faucet provides a minimum flow rate of 1.5 gallons per minute at 20 PSI. This means you receive effective water pressure for cleansing without wasting water. It offers the performance needed for bidet hygiene while helping conserve resources with every use.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does the faucet come with a drain assembly?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, the faucet includes a matching finish pop-up drain in the package. The drain assembly helps create a seamless look and makes installation easier. Coordinating the drain with the main faucet finishes the bathroom’s style. You won’t need to purchase an additional drain, so setup is quick and efficient.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is the faucet ADA compliant?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Absolutely, the three lever handles are crafted to meet ADA guidelines. This compliance means the faucet is usable by individuals with limited mobility or physical challenges. The handles are easy to grip and turn, making this faucet a thoughtful choice for multi-generational homes or shared spaces where accessibility matters.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I maintain the oil rubbed bronze finish?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"To keep your faucet looking fresh, wipe it regularly with a damp, soft cloth. Avoid abrasive cleaners or harsh chemicals, as these can damage the finish. Occasional light polishing with a non-abrasive cleaner helps retain its beautiful look. Proper maintenance keeps the surface clean and the color rich.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I use this faucet with all bidet models?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This faucet fits most standard bidet setups with a deck mount and 1\/2 inch IPS connection. However, it is best to check the specifications of your particular fixture before installation. The compact design and adjustable handles suit many modern and classic bidet styles.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a reliable, elegant, and accessible solution, choose the Kingston Brass KB325 Magellan 3-Handle Bidet Faucet in Oil Rubbed Bronze. Its quality construction, thoughtful features, and classic looks will upgrade your bathroom instantly. Keywords: Kingston, Brass, Bidet, Faucet.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Kingston Brass","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47091921748203,"sku":"LPNO388425454","price":121.42,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/IMG_4308_f7a90f66-353e-4589-87b2-019789e9ca03.jpg?v=1763703624"},{"product_id":"haggar-boys-suit-set-12-93ea","title":"Haggar Boys' 4-Piece Suit Set - Black\/White, Size 12","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. Grade C. All pieces are included. Appears used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Haggar Boys’ 4-Piece Suit Set in black and white, size 12, is a great choice for young boys. This set brings a blend of comfort, durability, and timeless style, making it a must-have for formal events.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis full outfit includes a classic black blazer, a sharp white dress shirt, adjustable-fit black pants, and a smart coordinating tie. The blazer is fully lined and features a chest pocket, two flap pockets, and two internal pockets. Buttoned cuffs and a back vent create a tailored yet comfortable fit. Spare buttons are included for convenience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe material mix—60% cotton and 40% polyester—balances strength and softness. The fabric resists wrinkles and is easy to care for. Your child will look put-together for hours and stay comfortable. Adjustable-waist pants grow with your child, helped by side elastics that provide a better fit. Designed for movement, these pants are great for active boys who want to look sharp while playing or walking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis suit set works well for many occasions. These include weddings, graduations, performances, and family gatherings. The refined design ensures your boy looks his best, whatever the celebration. The slim fit offers a modern look while still making it easy for him to move. To get a looser fit, size up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Haggar brand is trusted for both comfort and quality. The construction is sturdy, and stitching details ensure the outfit will last. Many families choose Haggar for special moments that make memories. The brand has a strong reputation for creating polished and reliable children’s clothing. You can read more about their history and commitment to quality on the \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/www.haggar.com\/\"\u003eofficial Haggar website\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eParents appreciate the practical details. The adjustable waist means more wears over more months. The easy-on, easy-off shirt is ideal for kids who dress themselves. All four pieces pair well with other wardrobes, adding versatility and making this set a smart investment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCustomer feedback is positive. Parents praise the elegant appearance and the feel of the suit. They note the flexibility from pants that stretch. Some buyers say sizing runs small, so always refer to the included size chart for the right choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWould you like to see similar outfits or more styles for boys? \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/apparel\"\u003eBrowse our apparel collection here\u003c\/a\u003e for more formal options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What sizes can I order for the Haggar boys’ suit set?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Haggar boys’ suit sets are available in sizes 6 through 16. Common sizes include 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14, so you will find one for most ages. Please check the size chart before buying. Kids may differ in height and build, even if they are the same age, so the chart will help get the best fit. This makes it easy to pick the right size for your young one.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Do the pants adjust and fit as my child grows?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes. The pants have side elastic bands. These let you loosen or tighten the waistband for comfort and growth. This design is helpful for younger children who are still growing fast. Adjustable waists mean you won’t have to replace the pants right away as your child gets taller or gains weight. This extends the life of the suit and keeps your child comfortable as they move and play.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this suit appropriate for less formal occasions like church or birthday dinners?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This suit is mainly made for formal occasions such as weddings, recitals, holidays, or ceremonies. However, it can work for some dressy-casual events, depending on the setting. For example, remove the tie for a more relaxed look at church or family dinners. Mix the blazer and shirt with other casual pants for less formal style. The pieces are versatile and can be dressed up or down as needed so your child always has the right outfit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Haggar Boys’ 4-Piece Suit Set is a reliable choice for parents who want quality and value. It ensures your child always looks his best at important moments. Enjoy the confidence that comes with well-made, classic attire. For more details on suits and formal wear, see this helpful guide: \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Suit_(clothing)\"\u003eSuit (clothing) - Wikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: suit, boys, formal, attire\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Haggar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47166525636843,"sku":"LPNO400379517","price":62.69,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61_hvm1-t5L._AC_SX569.jpg?v=1765181847"},{"product_id":"ama-cpt-icd10-hcpcs-2025-bundle-c552","title":"AMA CPT Book, ICD-10 Code Book, HCPCS Book - 2025 Physician Bundle by AAPC","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good\u003cbr\u003eMissing original packaging. Grade C. Previous owner made notes throughout both books.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe AMA CPT Book, ICD-10 Code Book, and HCPCS Book - 2025 Physician Bundle by AAPC is an all-in-one solution for medical coding. This set includes up-to-date AMA CPT, ICD-10, and HCPCS coding books. It is perfect for coders and billers who need current references for exams, documentation, and billing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis \u003cstrong\u003eCPT\u003c\/strong\u003e bundle is trusted by healthcare professionals. It contains the latest manuals for AMA CPT 2025 Professional Edition, HCPCS Level II Expert 2025, and ICD-10-CM Expert 2025. Each book features the official code sets, detailed guidelines, and highlights all changes for 2025. Stay ahead with the most recent information required for medical coding compliance and fast, effective reimbursement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe AMA CPT 2025 Professional Edition simplifies finding accurate \u003cstrong\u003eCPT\u003c\/strong\u003e codes. The streamlined table of contents and index speed up searches for codes, procedures, and conditions. Each section contains updates, official rules, and tools like CPT Changes, CPT Assistant, and Radiology examples. Use these tools to reduce coding mistakes and denials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eHCPCS Level II Expert 2025 covers every 2025 HCPCS code for billing supplies, drugs, and equipment. It contains easy-reference entries and unique crosswalks from G codes to the \u003cstrong\u003eCPT\u003c\/strong\u003e book. This helps match codes for Medicare or commercial payers. BETOS codes and their simple descriptions make billing cleaner. Fold-out covers show anesthesia, ambulance, and ambulatory modifiers at a glance. These additions enhance accuracy when coding complex claims.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe ICD-10-CM Expert 2025 is ideal for daily use. It presents descriptive, easy-to-follow code sets in a logical sequence. Exclusive quick-view charts, clear conventions, symbols, and updated notes make learning ICD-10 fast. Coders will see new and revised codes faster. The guidance inside boosts confidence for all experience levels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMedical coders, billing departments, and healthcare staff rely on this \u003cstrong\u003eCPT\u003c\/strong\u003e bundle. The spiral-bound design lets pages stay open and flat on your desk. Flip through or write notes anytime. This format supports fast referencing and reduces common workflow frustrations in busy offices or test settings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe 2025 Physician Bundle by AAPC delivers more than code updates. It is crafted to help users save time and avoid costly errors. Combined indexes, quick charts, and helpful cross-references let you find what you need in seconds. Whether studying for exams, submitting claims, or updating internal records, this bundle is your dependable partner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBecause medical billing changes frequently, it is vital to use trusted, up-to-date books. The AMA, ICD-10, and HCPCS books in this bundle help practices stay compliant and reduce denied claims. Following these industry-recognized standards lowers risk and ensures correct reimbursement for services.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBuying used coding books with grade C condition can be a smart decision. You get full 2025 content at a reduced price. Please note, some pages have notes from a past owner. There is no original box. However, the content inside remains practical and complete for your needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAll books in this set prepare you for real-world coding and most AAPC certification exams. Use them to practice sample questions, review guideline updates, and learn efficient search strategies. Many students and professionals keep these on hand for both daily tasks and review sessions. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eReady to learn more about coding standards or these specific manuals? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.ama-assn.org\/\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eAmerican Medical Association\u003c\/a\u003e for official information on medical coding and industry updates. You can also view our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/all\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\" target=\"_blank\"\u003egeneral-merchandise collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more study materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What exams does this bundle prepare me for?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The 2025 Physician Bundle by AAPC matches most coding certification exams for the year 2025. It includes AMA CPT, ICD-10, and HCPCS books, which are needed for popular AAPC exams like CPC and others. Candidates should check official exam outlines, but these books cover coding sections commonly tested in certification courses. The set is also used for practice exams and study group work.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What are the main features of the AMA CPT 2025 Professional Edition?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The AMA CPT 2025 Professional Edition includes every new and revised CPT code for 2025. It has easy-to-navigate contents and an index for fast lookups. The manual provides guidance, tips, and real-world coding examples. Extra references such as CPT Changes and Assistant help users avoid denials. These features support anyone from novice coders to experienced professionals.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How does the spiral-bound format benefit users?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e A spiral-bound design lets the coding books open flat on your workspace. This makes it easier to read, type, and write notes. Coders can keep their place during long study sessions. If you share references or train others, spiral binding lets multiple people see one page. The format is practical for anyone handling codes daily.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I use this bundle if I'm working at a clinic, hospital, or billing service?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, this bundle works well for clinics, hospitals, and third-party billing services. Each book provides coding details for a wide range of procedures. Larger teams or practices use these for claims submissions, audits, and training. The bundle adapts to almost any medical setting focused on compliance and accuracy.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Do these books help with code changes or insurance updates?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Absolutely. All manuals spot and explain 2025 rule, guideline, and code changes. Each book highlights what’s new using special icons or tables. The content covers updates from insurance carriers and government agencies. Reading these details helps users prevent problems with claims or audits throughout the year.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What exams does this bundle prepare me for?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The 2025 Physician Bundle by AAPC matches most coding certification exams for the year 2025. It includes AMA CPT, ICD-10, and HCPCS books, which are needed for popular AAPC exams like CPC and others. Candidates should check official exam outlines, but these books cover coding sections commonly tested in certification courses. The set is also used for practice exams and study group work.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What are the main features of the AMA CPT 2025 Professional Edition?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The AMA CPT 2025 Professional Edition includes every new and revised CPT code for 2025. It has easy-to-navigate contents and an index for fast lookups. The manual provides guidance, tips, and real-world coding examples. Extra references such as CPT Changes and Assistant help users avoid denials. These features support anyone from novice coders to experienced professionals.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How does the spiral-bound format benefit users?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"A spiral-bound design lets the coding books open flat on your workspace. This makes it easier to read, type, and write notes. Coders can keep their place during long study sessions. If you share references or train others, spiral binding lets multiple people see one page. The format is practical for anyone handling codes daily.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I use this bundle if I'm working at a clinic, hospital, or billing service?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, this bundle works well for clinics, hospitals, and third-party billing services. Each book provides coding details for a wide range of procedures. Larger teams or practices use these for claims submissions, audits, and training. The bundle adapts to almost any medical setting focused on compliance and accuracy.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Do these books help with code changes or insurance updates?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Absolutely. All manuals spot and explain 2025 rule, guideline, and code changes. Each book highlights what’s new using special icons or tables. The content covers updates from insurance carriers and government agencies. Reading these details helps users prevent problems with claims or audits throughout the year.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: AMA, CPT, ICD-10, HCPCS.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"AAPC","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47186394185963,"sku":"LPNO395131097","price":288.13,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/718f6mIPlWL._SL1200_-Copy.jpg?v=1765774509"},{"product_id":"iuv-womens-square-toe-cowboy-boots-65cb","title":"IUV Women's Square Toe Mid-Calf Cowboy Boots – Stylish \u0026 Comfortable","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. Grade A. Good condition. Worn once.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDiscover style and comfort with IUV Women's Square Toe Mid-Calf Cowboy Boots. These boots offer a versatile look with Western flair. Transition from casual days to special nights effortlessly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThese cowboy boots are crafted from soft, synthetic leather. The material is breathable and lightweight. They mimic the feel of genuine leather but are animal-friendly. The rubber sole is tough and supportive. Walk on slippery or uneven ground with confidence. Experience great traction and stability every step.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe square toe gives extra wiggle room for your toes. Elegant embroidery adds classic charm. Their subtle retro feel is perfect for today’s fashion trends. A 2.5-inch heel provides a gentle lift. Feel taller while staying comfortable all day. The cushioned latex insole and padded lining help reduce foot fatigue. Wear them during long events or quick outings with ease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePutting on these boots is fast and hassle-free. Pull-on tabs make it easy to slip them on and off. The shape and material help your feet breathe. Lightweight design means you stay comfortable without feeling weighed down.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDress them up or down as needed. Pair these boots with jeans, skirts, or dresses. Mix and match your favorite outfits for parties or casual gatherings. Their design is also great for country concerts and outdoor festivals. Wear them at weddings, or for everyday errands for a standout look.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose from standard US women’s sizes. These boots fit most feet well. Check the size chart if you’re unsure. If your feet are wide or you’re between sizes, sizing up is a good choice. For extra help, our friendly customer service team is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvest in a pair that balances fashion, comfort, and long-lasting quality. IUV Women's Square Toe Mid-Calf Cowboy Boots are durable and practical. They’ll quickly become a go-to in your closet. Their look fits many seasons and settings, so you get more value for your purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a focus on both toughness and style, these cowboy boots handle daily use. The reinforced stitching helps them last longer. Their mid-calf height protects your ankles from minor bumps. They also keep your legs warm in cooler weather. Enjoy the feeling of luxury without the high price tag.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThese boots make a thoughtful gift for loved ones or yourself. Wrap up quality and style for birthdays, holidays, or special milestones. Surprise someone with a pair that blends comfort and fashion for women who love new adventures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these boots true to size?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Most customers find IUV Women's Square Toe Mid-Calf Cowboy Boots fit as expected. Standard US sizing guides are used for each pair. However, everyone's feet are a little different. If you have wider feet or wear half sizes, trying one size up often works better. Look at our detailed size chart for more information. We're happy to assist you in finding the right fit if you reach out.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I care for these boots to keep them looking great?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Regular care helps your boots last longer and stay stylish. Gently wipe them with a damp cloth to remove surface dust and dirt. Do not soak or wash under running water. Avoid too much moisture and long sun exposure to protect the material. For stubborn stains, apply mild soap using a soft cloth, then wipe clean. Air dry your boots away from heaters or direct sunlight. Store them in a cool, dry place to avoid damage. Following these steps will maintain the color, stitching, and overall look of your cowboy boots.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these boots comfortable enough to wear all day?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Comfort is a focus for these boots. Padded lining and a cushioned insole help reduce foot strain. The boots are light enough to prevent fatigue after long hours. Many customers wear them to festivals, parties, or work without discomfort. Test them at home to see how they feel, and add extra insoles if you want even more support. With their flexible sole and soft inner lining, you can walk or stand for hours in comfort.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will these boots go well with different outfits?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes! These cowboy boots pair with jeans, dresses, and shorts. Try them with a blazer for a chic, modern look. They also add flair to basic outfits, like plain tee and denim combinations. Their neutral tones work well for many color palettes.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these boots true to size?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Most customers find IUV Women's Square Toe Mid-Calf Cowboy Boots fit as expected. Standard US sizing guides are used for each pair. However, everyone's feet are a little different. If you have wider feet or wear half sizes, trying one size up often works better. Look at our detailed size chart for more information. We're happy to assist you in finding the right fit if you reach out.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I care for these boots to keep them looking great?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Regular care helps your boots last longer and stay stylish. Gently wipe them with a damp cloth to remove surface dust and dirt. Do not soak or wash under running water. Avoid too much moisture and long sun exposure to protect the material. For stubborn stains, apply mild soap using a soft cloth, then wipe clean. Air dry your boots away from heaters or direct sunlight. Store them in a cool, dry place to avoid damage. Following these steps will maintain the color, stitching, and overall look of your cowboy boots.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these boots comfortable enough to wear all day?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Comfort is a focus for these boots. Padded lining and a cushioned insole help reduce foot strain. The boots are light enough to prevent fatigue after long hours. Many customers wear them to festivals, parties, or work without discomfort. Test them at home to see how they feel, and add extra insoles if you want even more support. With their flexible sole and soft inner lining, you can walk or stand for hours in comfort.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Will these boots go well with different outfits?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes! These cowboy boots pair with jeans, dresses, and shorts. Try them with a blazer for a chic, modern look. They also add flair to basic outfits, like plain tee and denim combinations. Their neutral tones work well for many color palettes.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnjoy classic Western fashion and long-lasting comfort with the IUV Women's Square Toe Mid-Calf Cowboy Boots. They are built for daily life and special moments. Stand out each season with boots that offer flexible style and reliable quality. Use your pair to make a statement wherever you go.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor other women's boots and apparel, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/apparel\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003ebrowse our collection here\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWant to learn more about cowboy boots? View \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Cowboy_boot\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia’s cowboy boot guide\u003c\/a\u003e for detailed info.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: IUV, cowboy, boots, women\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"IUV","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47329101512939,"sku":"LPNO403362084","price":34.19,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/81se7PdFntL._AC_SY575.jpg?v=1768183685"},{"product_id":"luvme-invisible-clip-extensions-inch-2862","title":"LUVME Invisible Clip-In Hair Extensions - 22\" 110g Natural Black Remy Human Hair","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. Grade A. Extensions included. Possibly used. No storage bag.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLUVME Invisible Clip-In Hair Extensions provide instant length and seamless volume. These clip-ins blend easily with your natural hair for a flawless finish. Enjoy outstanding comfort and style with premium Remy human hair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe 22-inch extensions offer added length. The 110g weight is ideal for extra fullness while remaining lightweight. Remy hair looks natural and soft, making it a top choice for everyday wear and special events. Natural black coloring works well for many hair shades and styles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe invisible design uses a unique, skin-like PU weft. This weft stays flat against your scalp, reducing bulk. The result is comfort and a discreet, invisible look. Wear your favorite styles without worrying about visible tracks or bumps.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEach set features six individual pieces. You can place the pieces wherever you need extra volume or length. High-quality clips provide reliable grip. They hold securely and stay put all day. Clips are gentle on scalp and hair, so you get stability and comfort together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnjoy styling versatility with these extensions. Remy hair can be straightened, curled, or waved using styling tools. Want a new shade? These extensions can be dyed by professionals. Feel free to match your preferred hair color. Always strand test first for best outcomes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMaintaining your LUVME extensions is simple and quick. Use a soft brush to keep hair tangle-free and shiny. After use, keep extensions in a cool, dry spot to avoid heat or sun damage. For long-lasting results, avoid daily washing. Instead, clean sparingly and let extensions air dry. Limit heat styling to below 250°F to keep the hair healthy and silky.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLUVME Invisible Clip-In Hair Extensions are ideal for quick hair changes. If you want length and volume but do not want glue or tape methods, this product is a smart choice. Enjoy transformation without commitment. Use every day or for special occasions like parties and weddings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis premium set suits beginners and stylists alike. The secure clip-in method means you can attach and remove extensions in minutes. No salons or extra equipment are required. Add layers, use up-dos, or simply boost your daily style. These extensions let you experiment safely and confidently. Gift them to friends or use them as a beauty upgrade for yourself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I dye the LUVME Invisible Clip-In Hair Extensions to match my hair color?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e These clip-in extensions are made from 100% Remy human hair, which allows for custom coloring. Dyeing offers flexibility to match your exact hair shade or try something new. For best results, a strand test is recommended before coloring the whole set. Seeking the help of a professional stylist greatly reduces risk of color damage. Proper care after dyeing keeps hair shiny and avoids dryness or tangling.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I properly care for and maintain these clip-in extensions?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Begin care by brushing gently with a soft-bristle brush before and after every use. Remove tangles to prevent breakage. Store extensions somewhere cool, dry, and away from direct sunlight. Avoid over-washing, as infrequent washing helps prolong their life. Use sulfate-free shampoo for cleaning. Keep heat styling temperatures low, under 250°F, to prevent damaging the Remy hair. Air-drying is best after washing. Following these steps will retain quality and shine for months.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are the clips secure enough for all-day wear? Will the extensions cause discomfort or move around during daily activities?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e LUVME uses sturdy, comfortable clips to fasten each weft. The clips are made to grip natural hair tightly so the extensions stay where placed. Most users report no slipping, even during active days or light exercise. If installed correctly and checked for comfort before going out, the extensions should not cause pain or move throughout the day. For added hold, tease your roots lightly before clipping in.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Who should consider using LUVME Invisible Clip-In Hair Extensions? \n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e These are ideal for people who want to add volume or length without long-term bonding or professional installation. They work for thin, fine, or medium hair types. Suitable for those new to clip-ins as well as stylists looking for quick enhancements. The invisible design is perfect if you want a low-profile, natural result. They are great for anyone who likes to switch up style for events or day-to-day fashion without damaging real hair.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I use heat styling tools like curling irons or flat irons on these extensions?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, you can use heat styling tools on LUVME Remy hair. Set tools no higher than 250°F to protect hair integrity. Always use a heat protection spray before styling. Styling allows for a range of looks from sleek to curled, but controlled heat use will keep extensions smooth and silky.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I dye the LUVME Invisible Clip-In Hair Extensions to match my hair color?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"These clip-in extensions are made from 100% Remy human hair, which allows for custom coloring. Dyeing offers flexibility to match your exact hair shade or try something new. For best results, a strand test is recommended before coloring the whole set. Seeking the help of a professional stylist greatly reduces risk of color damage. Proper care after dyeing keeps hair shiny and avoids dryness or tangling.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I properly care for and maintain these clip-in extensions?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Begin care by brushing gently with a soft-bristle brush before and after every use. Remove tangles to prevent breakage. Store extensions somewhere cool, dry, and away from direct sunlight. Avoid over-washing, as infrequent washing helps prolong their life. Use sulfate-free shampoo for cleaning. Keep heat styling temperatures low, under 250°F, to prevent damaging the Remy hair. Air-drying is best after washing. Following these steps will retain quality and shine for months.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are the clips secure enough for all-day wear? Will the extensions cause discomfort or move around during daily activities?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"LUVME uses sturdy, comfortable clips to fasten each weft. The clips are made to grip natural hair tightly so the extensions stay where placed. Most users report no slipping, even during active days or light exercise. If installed correctly and checked for comfort before going out, the extensions should not cause pain or move throughout the day. For added hold, tease your roots lightly before clipping in.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Who should consider using LUVME Invisible Clip-In Hair Extensions?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"These are ideal for people who want to add volume or length without long-term bonding or professional installation. They work for thin, fine, or medium hair types. Suitable for those new to clip-ins as well as stylists looking for quick enhancements. The invisible design is perfect if you want a low-profile, natural result. They are great for anyone who likes to switch up style for events or day-to-day fashion without damaging real hair.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I use heat styling tools like curling irons or flat irons on these extensions?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, you can use heat styling tools on LUVME Remy hair. Set tools no higher than 250°F to protect hair integrity. Always use a heat protection spray before styling. Styling allows for a range of looks from sleek to curled, but controlled heat use will keep extensions smooth and silky.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWant more detailed information about Remy hair and extension care? Check the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Hair_extension\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia page on hair extensions\u003c\/a\u003e for in-depth discussion and professional insights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDiscover more premium beauty and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003ehair extensions\u003c\/a\u003e for your personal care routine in our featured collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: LUVME, extensions, clip-in, Remy\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"LUVME","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47330346696939,"sku":"LPNO426417792","price":94.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/81TS298bo4L._SL1500.jpg?v=1768193770"},{"product_id":"toolhome-temperature-controller-a7c5","title":"Toolhome Digital Temperature Controller with Accessories, Black, 110V – User-Friendly and Versatile","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. Grade A. All pieces included. May have slight signs of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eToolhome Digital Temperature Controller gives you precise, reliable, and user-friendly temperature management. This controller is a compact, versatile device for both professional use and at-home projects. Its smart design and simple interface fit a variety of temperature control needs and applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe LCD on this controller is clear and easy to read. Switch quickly between Celsius and Fahrenheit, making it ideal for any preference. It runs on standard 110V power, so it works with most North American outlets without adapters. Set up is quick. You can install it in minutes, and no complicated wiring is needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe temperature range covers 300°F to 999°F. This suits everything from precision home brewing to fish tanks and reptile homes. Want to keep seedling mats at just the right warmth? This controller helps, ensuring consistent growing temperatures any time of year. Toolhome’s precise readouts make sure your settings stay accurate, so your devices work safely and efficiently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSafety is at the core. The controller has built-in overheat protection to avoid accidental damage to your valuable equipment. A thermal cut-off feature gives extra peace of mind. Its sturdy shell is made from flame-retardant materials. This makes it safer for daily use in a busy workspace or home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccessories boost the Toolhome controller’s versatility. Inside the box, you might find a temperature probe, mounting brackets, and a manual for easy setup. The included probe is especially helpful for environments exposed to water, like aquariums or hydroponics. You get everything you need to start controlling temperature the same day it arrives. Replacement parts are also easy to order if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis controller’s plug-and-play setup is a real time-saver. Plug it in, attach your heating or cooling device, set your target temperature, and let it do the rest. A built-in memory function remembers your last settings if the power goes out. That means less time reconfiguring, and more time enjoying dependable temperature management.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eToolhome made this digital controller for many different workspaces. It fits neatly on desktops, shelves, and mounting boards. Use it for greenhouse projects, labs, pet habitats, or culinary experiments. The sturdy build ensures consistent performance over time. It also looks good thanks to a sleek black finish that blends into most environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf you need a replacement for an old model or want better temperature precision, Toolhome Digital Temperature Controller is a smart upgrade. Users note its easy setup, reliable accuracy, and safety features make it a top pick for professionals and hobbyists alike. The included accessories let you adapt it to new projects without extra purchases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor more advanced electronics and control devices, check out our full \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/electronics\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eelectronics Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. This shop offers tools and devices that simplify technical work.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the maximum power load for this temperature controller?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Toolhome Digital Temperature Controller safely manages devices up to 1000W at 110V. This load covers most heating pads, aquarium heaters, and fans commonly used at home or in small businesses. Using devices above this limit can risk damage to the unit or connected devices, so always check your equipment’s power rating.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is it possible to use this controller with both heating and cooling devices?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, this controller has dual relay outputs. That means you can connect one heater and one cooler at the same time. The unit automatically switches between heating and cooling modes as needed. It is ideal for environments where both warmth and cooling are critical for equipment or pets. When using both, make sure the total power does not exceed the 1000W maximum.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the included temperature probe safe to use in wet or humid spaces?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Toolhome temperature probe is waterproof. This makes it suitable for aquariums, greenhouses, or hydroponics setups. Place the probe in water or moist soil to get accurate temperature feedback. Avoid putting the controller housing itself near wet areas to prevent electrical risk.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I reset the controller if I change locations?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e If you relocate your controller, simply unplug it and move the device. When plugged in again, it keeps your last temperature settings due to its built-in memory function. If you want to start fresh, follow the manual for a full reset. This returns it to default, letting you set new targets or calibrate as needed.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the maximum power load for this temperature controller?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Toolhome Digital Temperature Controller safely manages devices up to 1000W at 110V. This load covers most heating pads, aquarium heaters, and fans commonly used at home or in small businesses. Using devices above this limit can risk damage to the unit or connected devices, so always check your equipment’s power rating.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is it possible to use this controller with both heating and cooling devices?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, this controller has dual relay outputs. That means you can connect one heater and one cooler at the same time. The unit automatically switches between heating and cooling modes as needed. It is ideal for environments where both warmth and cooling are critical for equipment or pets. When using both, make sure the total power does not exceed the 1000W maximum.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is the included temperature probe safe to use in wet or humid spaces?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Toolhome temperature probe is waterproof. This makes it suitable for aquariums, greenhouses, or hydroponics setups. Place the probe in water or moist soil to get accurate temperature feedback. Avoid putting the controller housing itself near wet areas to prevent electrical risk.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I reset the controller if I change locations?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"If you relocate your controller, simply unplug it and move the device. When plugged in again, it keeps your last temperature settings due to its built-in memory function. If you want to start fresh, follow the manual for a full reset. This returns it to default, letting you set new targets or calibrate as needed.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSummary: Toolhome Digital Temperature Controller is a user-friendly, versatile option. Its clear LCD, memory backup, and included accessories create a full package. The wide temperature range and reliability support many uses, from hobbies to professional projects. This controller stands out for its easy installation and robust safety design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor more insights on how temperature controllers are used in various fields, refer to the detailed entry on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Temperature_controller\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eTemperature Controllers\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: temperature, controller, digital, Toolhome\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Toolhome","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47330528428267,"sku":"LPNO447337852","price":71.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61EDVurjR5L._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1768199822"},{"product_id":"adidas-campus-00s-cheetah-sneakers-white-5-b5c0","title":"Adidas Women's Campus 00s Cheetah Sneakers - White, Size 6.5 M","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Open Box, Grade A, Light Use\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDiscover classic style and modern flair with Adidas Women's Campus 00s Cheetah sneakers. The suede upper shows off a bold cheetah-print and crisp white color. These sneakers are comfortable and stylish. They suit both daily wear and unique looks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Adidas Campus 00s design takes cues from 2000s skate fashion. Each pair brings a retro look, but updates it with new materials and shapes. The secure lace-up closure ensures a snug fit. Soft textile lining means your feet feel great, even after hours. The durable rubber outsole gives you reliable traction. These sneakers handle many surfaces. Wear them on city walks, school days, or casual outings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis pair adapts to your style. The Cheetah print 3-Stripes draw attention without overpowering the shoe. Pair them with jeans or joggers for a sporty outfit. Try skirts or dresses when you want something bold but comfortable. They look great with many streetwear styles, adding a unique touch to any wardrobe. The Campus 00s cheetah collection stands out, whether you keep your look simple or go for a statement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdidas built durability into this Campus 00s model. The rubber outsole resists wear, so you can use them often. The comfortable fit supports everyday movements—walking, light play, or errands. The Grade A open-box condition means you get a near-new sneaker with only slight previous use. The attention to comfort is clear in details like the soft lining and the breathable tongue.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlanning a day out? These sneakers are ready. The classic silhouette fits many situations. You will look stylish at brunch, relaxed meet-ups, or city strolls. For more on the Adidas Campus line, see the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Adidas_Campus\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia Adidas Campus article\u003c\/a\u003e. This sneaker works as a staple piece in many streetwear collections. It fits both fans of retro culture and those who want something fresh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKey features include:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePremium suede upper with cheetah-print 3-Stripes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRegular fit with lace closure for a secure fit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSoft textile lining for enhanced comfort\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDurable rubber outsole for reliable traction\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInspired by 2000s skate culture for a retro vibe\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReady to blend classic and fresh styles? The Adidas Women's Campus 00s Cheetah brings them together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these sneakers true to size?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Adidas Women's Campus 00s Cheetah Sneakers generally fit true to size. Most users say ordering your usual size will result in the best fit. If you have wider feet, you might appreciate the slightly roomy toe box. As always, check the Adidas sizing chart to be sure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How should I care for the suede upper?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Suede requires gentle care to maintain its soft, textured appearance. Use a suede brush to remove dust and dirt after each wear. Avoid water and do not use harsh chemicals. If the sneakers get wet, let them air-dry away from direct sunlight. A suede protector spray can add extra defense, just be sure to test it on a small area first.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these sneakers suitable for athletic activities?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e These sneakers take inspiration from skate culture. However, they are built for comfort and everyday use rather than intense sports. The padding and sole support walking, light skating, and daily movement. They do not provide the kind of cushioning or ankle support needed for running, athletics, or heavy training. For high-impact use, consider a sneaker from Adidas' performance lines.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What outfits work best with these sneakers?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e These sneakers are versatile. Pair them with jeans and a tee for a casual look. Try leggings and a hoodie for sporty days. Dresses or skirts work for bolder styles. The cheetah print adds flair, so keep accessories simple if you want the shoes to stand out. They adapt to both subtle and statement outfits.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the Grade A open box mean they're used?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Grade A open box means the sneakers were opened but show minimal or no signs of wear. They are not heavily used. Expect a product very close to new. Any marks are very light, usually only from handling or brief trial wear. You benefit from great value and quality.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these sneakers true to size?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Adidas Women's Campus 00s Cheetah Sneakers generally fit true to size. Most users say ordering your usual size will provide the best fit. If you have wider feet, the toe box has a little extra room. Checking Adidas' size chart can give you added confidence.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How should I care for the suede upper?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Care for suede by brushing it gently with a suede brush after every use to remove dirt. Avoid water and harsh chemicals, and let the shoes dry naturally if wet. Consider applying a suede protector after testing in a small hidden spot.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these sneakers suitable for athletic activities?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"These sneakers are made for comfort and everyday use, not for sports. They have solid grip and cushioning for walking or light skate-inspired use. For high-impact training, select an Adidas performance shoe.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What outfits work best with these sneakers?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"These shoes work well with jeans, leggings, skirts, or dresses. The cheetah design is eye-catching, so balance your outfit to match the statement. Simple tops or accessories make the shoes the star.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does the Grade A open box mean they're used?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Grade A open box sneakers have been opened before but show minimal to no wear. Expect nearly new quality. Any signs of wear are very minor, offering you an excellent deal on a top product.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more stylish choices, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/apparel\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eexplore our apparel collection\u003c\/a\u003e. \n\u003cbr\u003e\nKey words: Adidas, Campus, Cheetah, Sneakers\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Adidas","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48202904797419,"sku":"LPNO490057622","price":116.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/IMG_1953.jpg?v=1777943087"},{"product_id":"aierlian-knife-sharpener-7de6","title":"AIERLIAN Knife Sharpener Tool – Precision Rolling Kit with Diamond \u0026 Ceramic Discs","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Open Box, Grade A, Light Use\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRestore and maintain your knives with the AIERLIAN Knife Sharpener Tool. This compact kitchen tool features diamond and ceramic discs to deliver a keen, precise edge every time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eAIERLIAN Knife Sharpener Tool\u003c\/strong\u003e stands out in any kitchen. Its rolling action makes sharpening simple and consistent. The innovative design uses two discs for extra performance. The #400 diamond disc handles coarse sharpening quickly. The #3000 ceramic disc polishes and refines your blade. Sharpen dull knives first, then roll on the ceramic disc for a smooth finish. Get razor-sharp results every time with this sharpener.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis tool is crafted for both beginners and seasoned cooks. The magnetic angle support lets you choose between a 15-degree or 20-degree edge. Use the 15-degree angle for fine slicing tasks or Asian-style blades. The 20-degree angle suits most Western kitchen knives. Magnets keep your blade stable for precise results, reducing slips and mistakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe design includes a sturdy natural wood support. The block is durable and fits well on kitchen counters. Its wooden style complements modern or classic kitchens. The ergonomic handle ensures a comfortable grip. You can sharpen knives without hand fatigue or strain. Lightweight construction makes it easy to store or carry around your home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the AIERLIAN Knife Sharpener takes just a few steps. Attach your knife to the support block at your chosen angle. Hold the handle comfortably. Use the diamond disc first, rolling gently over the knife edge. Replace the disc with the ceramic one for the finishing touch. This method removes dullness and creates a lasting edge. Each use is safe and controlled, even for newcomers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMaintenance is easy and fast. Wipe the discs with a dry cloth after each session. Store the tool in a dry spot, away from water and food debris. This adds years to your sharpener’s life. Regular care prevents buildup and keeps every sharpening session efficient. Follow these tips for best results every time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSharpening at home is safer and more cost-effective than replacing knives. A sharp knife reduces injury risk by cutting food clearly and with little pressure. Dull blades require effort and may slip, making the kitchen less safe. This sharpener tool keeps your knives efficient and preserves their edge for longer periods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product fits into modern cooking routines. Professional chefs and home cooks both benefit. Use it on common chef’s knives or smaller paring blades. It handles a range of blade thicknesses and steel types. Find out how a maintained kitchen knife can elevate your cooking speed and precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInvesting in a \u003cu\u003eknife sharpener\u003c\/u\u003e improves your entire kitchen workflow. You’ll notice smoother chopping, neater slices, and easier food preparation. This tool works for weekly maintenance or quick touch-ups before a meal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the AIERLIAN Knife Sharpener suitable for all types of knives?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The AIERLIAN Knife Sharpener was designed for most standard kitchen knives, including chef’s knives, utility knives, and paring knives. It offers fixed 15-degree and 20-degree angles for versatility. While most straight-edged kitchen knives are compatible, this tool does not work with serrated blades or scissors. If your knife is especially hard or soft steel, this sharpener still works thanks to the dual-disc combination. However, always check your manufacturer’s guidelines to keep your knives safe.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How often should I sharpen my knives using this tool?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Frequency depends on how often your knives see use. For daily cooks, sharpening every two months is usually enough. If you only cook occasionally, you can stretch this to four months or more. Always watch for dull edges or slow cuts as signs it’s time to sharpen. Regular upkeep with this tool means you rarely need to fully restore the blade—just weekly polishing can keep edges like new. Over time, you’ll learn the perfect schedule for your specific needs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can beginners use the AIERLIAN Knife Sharpener effectively?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, this tool is very beginner-friendly. The magnetic support system holds your knife steady, making sharpening less intimidating for first-time users. The step-by-step process is easy to follow. Even if you’ve never sharpened a knife, the tool’s stability and rolling action will guide you through. Practice once or twice to get the feeling. After that, keeping your kitchen knives sharp is quick and reliable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What maintenance does the AIERLIAN Knife Sharpener require?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e It is best to wipe the discs clean after every use. Keep the tool in a dry and dust-free area. If metal filings collect on the discs, use a soft brush for a deeper clean. Avoid submerging the wooden base in water to keep it in top condition. With normal maintenance, this sharpener is built to last for years. Well cared for tools result in better performance and safer sharpening every time.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What are the key benefits of using a diamond and ceramic sharpener?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Diamond discs sharpen quickly and handle tough steel easily. They can remove nicks and restore a worn edge. Ceramic discs polish and refine, making the knife smoother and sharper. The combination means you get both fast sharpening and a smooth finish. This dual approach is popular with professional chefs and trusted by home cooks for versatile results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is the AIERLIAN Knife Sharpener suitable for all types of knives?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The AIERLIAN Knife Sharpener was designed for most standard kitchen knives, including chef’s knives, utility knives, and paring knives. It offers fixed 15-degree and 20-degree angles for versatility. While most straight-edged kitchen knives are compatible, this tool does not work with serrated blades or scissors. If your knife is especially hard or soft steel, this sharpener still works thanks to the dual-disc combination. However, always check your manufacturer’s guidelines to keep your knives safe.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How often should I sharpen my knives using this tool?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Frequency depends on how often your knives see use. For daily cooks, sharpening every two months is usually enough. If you only cook occasionally, you can stretch this to four months or more. Always watch for dull edges or slow cuts as signs it’s time to sharpen. Regular upkeep with this tool means you rarely need to fully restore the blade—just weekly polishing can keep edges like new. Over time, you’ll learn the perfect schedule for your specific needs.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can beginners use the AIERLIAN Knife Sharpener effectively?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, this tool is very beginner-friendly. The magnetic support system holds your knife steady, making sharpening less intimidating for first-time users. The step-by-step process is easy to follow. Even if you’ve never sharpened a knife, the tool’s stability and rolling action will guide you through. Practice once or twice to get the feeling. After that, keeping your kitchen knives sharp is quick and reliable.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What maintenance does the AIERLIAN Knife Sharpener require?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"It is best to wipe the discs clean after every use. Keep the tool in a dry and dust-free area. If metal filings collect on the discs, use a soft brush for a deeper clean. Avoid submerging the wooden base in water to keep it in top condition. With normal maintenance, this sharpener is built to last for years. Well cared for tools result in better performance and safer sharpening every time.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What are the key benefits of using a diamond and ceramic sharpener?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Diamond discs sharpen quickly and handle tough steel easily. They can remove nicks and restore a worn edge. Ceramic discs polish and refine, making the knife smoother and sharper. The combination means you get both fast sharpening and a smooth finish. This dual approach is popular with professional chefs and trusted by home cooks for versatile results.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo learn more about knife sharpening and best practices, check out \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.wikihow.com\/Sharpen-a-Knife\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003ethis comprehensive guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eDiscover more kitchen essentials in our home collection\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: knife, sharpener, kitchen, tool\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"AIERLIAN","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48204066914539,"sku":"LPNO486862089","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/IMG_1728_3aee97c5-5826-4520-931d-15c82dba4dc3.jpg?v=1777959422"},{"product_id":"cariloha-aloha-soft-bamboo-sheets-ac65","title":"Cariloha Aloha Soft 4-Piece Bamboo Sheet Set | Natural | Split King","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Missing original packaging, Grade B, light use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnjoy premium comfort every night with the Cariloha Aloha Soft 4-Piece Bamboo Sheet Set. These natural-colored Split King bamboo sheets offer superior softness and cooling. They are made from 100% viscose, which comes from bamboo. Upgrade your bedroom with these sustainable sheets for a restful and eco-friendly sleep experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Cariloha Aloha Soft Bamboo Sheets use a gentle twill weave. This makes the bedding feel silky-smooth yet strong. The bamboo fabric naturally promotes airflow. You stay cool in summer and cozy whenever it's cold. Bamboo's moisture-wicking helps you feel dry all night.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach Split King set contains one flat sheet, two fitted sheets, and two pillowcases. These pieces fit mattresses up to 16 inches deep. Fitted sheets come with a secure elastic edge around the bottom. This feature keeps sheets tight, even if you move while you sleep. It prevents slippage for uninterrupted rest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned for comfort and health, these sheets are hypoallergenic and resist odors. They are gentle for allergy sufferers and those with sensitive skin. Bamboo bedding helps protect against dust mites and moisture buildup. This is a good choice if you want a clean and healthy sleeping environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe natural color of these sheets complements many room styles. They bring a calming, modern vibe to your space. Whether your decor is classic or trendy, the sheets fit right in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCleaning is easy. Wash with cold water and similar colors. Use a mild liquid detergent. Skip bleach, softeners, or dryer sheets to preserve their bamboo softness. Tumble dry on low and take out soon for fewer wrinkles. With proper care, the fabric becomes fluffier and softer after each wash.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBamboo sheets like these are also thoughtful for the planet. Bamboo grows quickly and does not need harsh chemicals. Choosing this set supports a greener future. Sustainable bedding is a smart upgrade for any household.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy pick Cariloha Aloha Soft Sheets?\u003c\/strong\u003e The answer is simple. They combine lasting comfort with eco benefits. The fit is tailored for Split King beds, so there’s no bunching or stretching. People who value luxury, easy care, and environmental responsibility will enjoy these sheets. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompared to regular cotton, bamboo bedding stands apart. It actively resists odors and allergens. It also stays cooler than many fabrics. These benefits can improve your sleep and make cleaning up less of a hassle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCariloha makes products that reflect ethical values. Their sheets are popular for both softness and strength. To learn more about bamboo textiles, visit the official \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Bamboo_textile\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia page on bamboo textiles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What are the exact sizes for each piece in the Split King sheet set?\n  \u003cbr\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This Split King set offers generous sizing for most beds. The flat sheet is 111 inches wide and 106 inches long, so it easily covers deep mattresses. Each fitted sheet is 38 inches wide by 80 inches long, crafted to fit two Twin XL mattresses side by side, which is standard for Split Kings. Both fitted sheets hug mattresses up to 16 inches deep. The pillowcases are 20 by 36 inches, giving plenty of room for King-size pillows. Proper sizing ensures a snug and seamless fit so the sheets stay smooth and neat through the night.\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e I have sensitive skin and allergies. How do these sheets help?\n  \u003cbr\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Cariloha Aloha Soft Sheets are an excellent pick for sensitive sleepers. The bamboo fibers naturally resist common allergens, including dust mites and mold. The hypoallergenic material stops unwanted irritants from building up. This makes your bedding healthier and more comfortable if you have allergies or delicate skin. Bamboo also feels smooth, reducing friction and irritation. Many people say their skin feels better with bamboo sheets compared to some other types, like polyester or lower-grade cotton.\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What should I do to keep my bamboo sheets soft and long-lasting?\n  \u003cbr\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e To keep your bamboo sheets soft, always use cold water and a gentle cycle. Select a mild detergent without strong chemicals or fragrances. Wash only with other soft items to avoid roughness. Do not use bleach or fabric softeners, as they can damage bamboo fibers. Tumble dry on low, and remove quickly for smoother sheets. Avoid ironing. If you follow these easy steps, your sheets will stay plush, fresh, and durable wash after wash. Bamboo gets even softer over time, so your comfort continues to improve.\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these sheets eco-friendly and safe for the environment?\n  \u003cbr\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Cariloha Aloha Soft Sheets show a strong commitment to eco-friendliness. Bamboo is a fast-growing plant that does not need pesticides or much water to thrive. Manufacturers process bamboo into viscose with less impact compared to certain traditional fabrics. By choosing bamboo, you reduce your carbon footprint and encourage more responsible production practices. Read more on bamboo’s sustainability on industry and ecological sites.\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What are the exact sizes for each piece in the Split King sheet set?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This Split King set offers generous sizing for most beds. The flat sheet is 111 inches wide and 106 inches long, so it easily covers deep mattresses. Each fitted sheet is 38 inches wide by 80 inches long, crafted to fit two Twin XL mattresses side by side, which is standard for Split Kings. Both fitted sheets hug mattresses up to 16 inches deep. The pillowcases are 20 by 36 inches, giving plenty of room for King-size pillows. Proper sizing ensures a snug and seamless fit so the sheets stay smooth and neat through the night.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"I have sensitive skin and allergies. How do these sheets help?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Cariloha Aloha Soft Sheets are an excellent pick for sensitive sleepers. The bamboo fibers naturally resist common allergens, including dust mites and mold. The hypoallergenic material stops unwanted irritants from building up. This makes your bedding healthier and more comfortable if you have allergies or delicate skin. Bamboo also feels smooth, reducing friction and irritation. Many people say their skin feels better with bamboo sheets compared to some other types, like polyester or lower-grade cotton.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What should I do to keep my bamboo sheets soft and long-lasting?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"To keep your bamboo sheets soft, always use cold water and a gentle cycle. Select a mild detergent without strong chemicals or fragrances. Wash only with other soft items to avoid roughness. Do not use bleach or fabric softeners, as they can damage bamboo fibers. Tumble dry on low, and remove quickly for smoother sheets. Avoid ironing. If you follow these easy steps, your sheets will stay plush, fresh, and durable wash after wash. Bamboo gets even softer over time, so your comfort continues to improve.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these sheets eco-friendly and safe for the environment?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Cariloha Aloha Soft Sheets show a strong commitment to eco-friendliness. Bamboo is a fast-growing plant that does not need pesticides or much water to thrive. Manufacturers process bamboo into viscose with less impact compared to certain traditional fabrics. By choosing bamboo, you reduce your carbon footprint and encourage more responsible production practices. Read more on bamboo’s sustainability on industry and ecological sites.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the Cariloha Aloha Soft 4-Piece Bamboo Sheet Set for sustainable comfort, breathability, and easy care. This eco bedding adds practical style and peace of mind to your bedroom. Enjoy the benefits of bamboo and see the difference a higher-quality sheet can make. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWant more details? Find out about bamboo textiles at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Bamboo_textile\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our home collection\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: bamboo, sheets, bedding, comfort\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Cariloha","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48260477976811,"sku":"LPNO493353114","price":125.1,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/716OgfyUn7L._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1778660811"},{"product_id":"xgu-f150-carplay-stereo","title":"XGU Ford F150 CarPlay Stereo — 9\" Touchscreen, GPS, 2G+32G","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, 'Segoe UI', Roboto, sans-serif; color: #333; max-width: 680px; margin: 0 auto;\"\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"display: inline-block; background: #1a1a1a; color: #d4af37; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13px; padding: 4px 14px; border-radius: 4px; margin-bottom: 12px; letter-spacing: 1px;\"\u003e\n  GRADE: C — Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Unit linked to a previous owner's account at time of inspection — buyer will need to resolve account association before full use.\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"font-size: 15px; line-height: 1.7; margin-bottom: 16px;\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Unit linked to a previous owner's account at time of inspection — buyer will need to resolve account association before full use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis XGU 9-inch CarPlay stereo brings modern infotainment to your Ford F150. It supports Apple CarPlay, Android Auto, GPS navigation, 5G WiFi, and a 36-band EQ. Compatible with F150 XL and XLT trims from 2009 through 2014, this touchscreen head unit is a genuine upgrade over the factory radio.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe 9-inch IPS touchscreen is the star of this stereo. It features a 2.5D anti-glare display that stays readable even in direct sunlight. The panel is bright and responsive. Touch inputs register quickly and accurately. The large screen size makes maps and media easy to view at a glance. This is a significant step up from older factory displays. The F150 dashboard cutout accepts the unit for a clean factory-style fit. Mounting brackets and a dash fascia panel are included in the kit. Installation is straightforward with the provided plug-and-play wiring harness. No wire cutting is required for most 2009–2014 F150 applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWireless and wired CarPlay are both supported on this touchscreen head unit. Android Auto connectivity is also built in. Your phone pairs in seconds for instant access to navigation and audio apps. Google Maps, Apple Maps, Waze, and Spotify all work seamlessly. Siri and Google Assistant voice commands keep your hands on the wheel. MirrorLink support lets you mirror compatible Android phone screens directly. The 5G WiFi radio connects to hotspots quickly and with minimal lag. This stereo also supports offline map downloads so you can navigate without mobile data. The F150 upgrade covers both daily commuting and long road trips equally well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder the hood, the XGU stereo runs on an 8-core processor. It ships with 2GB of RAM and 32GB of onboard storage. The processor handles multitasking without freezing or stuttering. Built-in cooling vents prevent thermal throttling in hot weather. The unit has been tested through extended use with no reported lag. Apps launch quickly from the home screen. The Android-based OS allows side-loading of additional navigation and media apps. System performance remains smooth even with multiple apps running in the background. This is a meaningful performance advantage over lower-spec aftermarket units. The reliable chipset supports long-term daily use in your F150.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe audio system built into this stereo is genuinely impressive. A 36-band EQ gives you fine-grained control over your sound profile. DSP tuning helps balance audio output across all factory speakers. You can customize bass, midrange, and treble to match your taste. FM and RDS radio are supported with clear reception. The unit retains compatibility with your factory steering wheel controls. Factory amplifier integration is preserved as well. RCA outputs are available for connecting an external amplifier if desired. The labeled wiring harness makes speaker and audio connections straightforward. Better audio quality is one of the most immediately noticeable improvements after installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA 1080P backup camera is included in this kit. The camera connects via the provided RCA cable. It activates automatically when you shift into reverse. The wide-angle view eliminates common blind spots behind your truck. Camera wiring routes cleanly to the rear of the vehicle. An additional power lead is included for clean camera installation. The GPS antenna is a dedicated external unit that mounts to your dash or roof area. GPS lock is fast and accurate for real-time navigation. The included external microphone enables clear hands-free calling. All cables and accessory hardware are present in the photographed kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe wiring harness in this kit is designed specifically for Ford F150 applications. It includes the factory-fit Ford connector plugs for a clean plug-and-play install. Labeled RCA connections identify each audio and video input clearly. An AUX input is present for connecting additional audio sources. The SWC (steering wheel control) adapter is included and pre-wired. Heat-resistant wire insulation is used throughout the harness. The harness design avoids the need for any permanent vehicle modifications. Two dash fascia panels are included to accommodate manual A\/C and Auto A\/C variants. Mounting brackets attach to the head unit chassis securely. The full accessory suite supports a complete installation without purchasing additional parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more about in-vehicle infotainment systems and their technology on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/In-car_entertainment\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia's In-Car Entertainment article\u003c\/a\u003e. For more automotive electronics, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our Automotive Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will this CarPlay stereo fit my specific Ford F150 trim and year?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e This stereo is designed for Ford F150 XL and XLT trims from 2009 through 2014. It supports both manual A\/C and Auto A\/C console configurations. Two dash fascia panels are included to cover both variants. The kit includes Ford-specific plug-and-play connector harnesses for a direct fit. Always verify your trim level and A\/C type before purchase to confirm compatibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e What does it mean that the unit was linked to a previous owner's account?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e This unit was inspected and found to be associated with a prior user's account at the time of testing. The account association is typically tied to an app or platform login stored on the device. Buyers should perform a factory reset after purchase to clear prior account data. Most users can complete this process independently through the device's settings menu. If assistance is needed, the manufacturer's support team can provide step-by-step guidance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does this stereo support offline GPS navigation without a data connection?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e This touchscreen head unit supports offline map downloads via its built-in WiFi connection. Once maps are downloaded, full GPS turn-by-turn navigation works without any mobile data or hotspot. The external GPS antenna included in the kit ensures strong satellite signal acquisition. Popular apps like Google Maps and Waze offer offline map caching as well. This makes the F150 stereo suitable for remote areas with limited cell coverage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are steering wheel controls retained after installing this head unit?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e This stereo includes a steering wheel control (SWC) adapter as part of the wiring harness. The adapter interfaces with your factory F150 steering wheel buttons. Volume, track skipping, and call answer functions are typically all retained. The adapter is pre-wired into the main harness for easy connection. No additional programming modules are required for most supported F150 models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Will this CarPlay stereo fit my specific Ford F150 trim and year?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This stereo is designed for Ford F150 XL and XLT trims from 2009 through 2014. It supports both manual A\/C and Auto A\/C console configurations. Two dash fascia panels are included to cover both variants. The kit includes Ford-specific plug-and-play connector harnesses for a direct fit. Always verify your trim level and A\/C type before purchase to confirm compatibility.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does it mean that the unit was linked to a previous owner's account?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This unit was inspected and found to be associated with a prior user's account at the time of testing. The account association is typically tied to an app or platform login stored on the device. Buyers should perform a factory reset after purchase to clear prior account data. Most users can complete this process independently through the device's settings menu. If assistance is needed, the manufacturer's support team can provide step-by-step guidance.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does this stereo support offline GPS navigation without a data connection?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This touchscreen head unit supports offline map downloads via its built-in WiFi connection. Once maps are downloaded, full GPS turn-by-turn navigation works without any mobile data or hotspot. The external GPS antenna included in the kit ensures strong satellite signal acquisition. Popular apps like Google Maps and Waze offer offline map caching as well. This makes the F150 stereo suitable for remote areas with limited cell coverage.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Are steering wheel controls retained after installing this head unit?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This stereo includes a steering wheel control (SWC) adapter as part of the wiring harness. The adapter interfaces with your factory F150 steering wheel buttons. Volume, track skipping, and call answer functions are typically all retained. The adapter is pre-wired into the main harness for easy connection. No additional programming modules are required for most supported F150 models.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis XGU CarPlay stereo represents a high-value infotainment upgrade for any 2009–2014 F150 owner. The combination of wireless CarPlay, Android Auto, GPS, and a 9-inch touchscreen is difficult to match at this price point. The 8-core processor and dedicated cooling vents make the platform genuinely reliable. All key accessories are included: backup camera, GPS antenna, microphone, wiring harness, and mounting hardware. The cosmetic wear on this used unit does not affect its functional capabilities. Buyers who prioritize performance over cosmetic perfection will find excellent value here.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe included 1080P backup camera adds meaningful safety value to your F150. Reversing confidence improves significantly with the wide-angle rear view on the 9-inch touchscreen. The camera activates instantly upon shifting to reverse. The RCA connection is simple and secure. This accessory alone is a notable upgrade over vehicles without any backup camera system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor F150 owners who want modern stereo features without a full dealer upgrade, this CarPlay head unit hits the mark. The touchscreen interface is intuitive and fast. The audio customization via 36-band EQ and DSP is genuinely useful. Factory steering wheel controls are retained for everyday convenience. This F150 stereo upgrade delivers a noticeably improved driving experience at a fraction of new pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin-bottom: 16px; font-size: 14px;\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600; width: 140px;\"\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003eXGU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003e2+32GB Stereo for Ford F150 09 to 12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"font-size: 12px; color: #888; border-top: 1px solid #eee; padding-top: 10px; margin-top: 16px;\"\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eUrban Supply Plus\u003c\/strong\u003e · Every item professionally inspected \u0026amp; graded\n   · SKU LPNO456438723\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"XGU","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":49146383794411,"sku":"LPNO456438723","price":47.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/item11043_5dcde9debfc5.jpg?v=1785791498"},{"product_id":"boatrip-starter-motor","title":"Boatrip Starter Motor — Toyota Camry RAV4 Highlander Fit","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, 'Segoe UI', Roboto, sans-serif; color: #333; max-width: 680px; margin: 0 auto;\"\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"display: inline-block; background: #1a1a1a; color: #d4af37; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13px; padding: 4px 14px; border-radius: 4px; margin-bottom: 12px; letter-spacing: 1px;\"\u003e\n  GRADE: B — Used - Good. Fully functional with normal wear. Minor cosmetic marks. One or two minor accessories missing.\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"font-size: 15px; line-height: 1.7; margin-bottom: 16px;\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. Fully functional with normal wear. Minor cosmetic marks. One or two minor accessories missing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis Boatrip YWD8001 starter motor is a reliable replacement for a wide range of Toyota, Lexus, Scion, and Pontiac vehicles. It delivers OEM-matching performance at a fraction of new-part pricing. The unit has been inspected and confirmed fully functional by Urban Supply Plus staff. This is a strong value pick for DIY mechanics and professional technicians alike.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLight wear is visible on the motor housing and solenoid body. Cosmetic marks are present from prior handling and storage. These surface blemishes do not affect function in any way. The drive pinion, solenoid terminals, and mounting flange are all structurally sound. Condition: light wear — minor cosmetic marks visible on housing, no cracks or structural damage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMounting hardware and warranty documentation are not included with this unit — see product photos for exactly what is in the box. The starter motor unit itself is present and complete. Buyers should source mounting bolts separately if needed. Please review all photos carefully before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Boatrip 17825 \/ YWD8001 starter motor is engineered to meet or exceed OEM specifications. It is built with new premium-quality internal components. The armature, brushes, and solenoid plunger are all manufactured to tight tolerances. This ensures reliable cold cranking and consistent engine starts. The unit carries the part number 281000A010 stamped on the housing, which has been verified against fitment databases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis starter motor fits a broad range of popular Toyota models. Compatible vehicles include the Toyota Camry (2002–2017), Sienna (2004–2016), Highlander (2004–2019), and RAV4 (2006–2018). It also fits the Toyota Solara (2002–2008) and Avalon (2005–2018). On the Lexus side, it covers the RX330, RX350, ES330, ES350, and NX200t. Scion xB and tC are also supported, as is the Pontiac Vibe. Always confirm your exact year, make, model, and engine size before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBoatrip has specialized in automotive starter motors and components for over 20 years. Their manufacturing facility holds ISO\/TS16949 quality system certification, updated to IATF 16949:2016. They also implemented the VRT quality management system promoted by Ford. These credentials reflect a serious commitment to quality control and production consistency. You can trust this replacement starter motor to perform reliably under real-world conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation is straightforward for anyone with basic mechanical experience. The standardized production dimensions ensure a precise drop-in fitment. No modifications or adaptors are required. The mounting flange holes align correctly with OEM positions. The solenoid connector is keyed to the correct orientation for supported vehicles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more about how automotive starter motors work on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Starter_(engine)\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia's Starter (engine) article\u003c\/a\u003e. Understanding the starter system can help you diagnose related issues before and after replacement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more automotive parts and accessories in our store: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our Automotive Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e Which vehicles is this starter motor compatible with?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e This Boatrip YWD8001 starter motor covers a wide range of popular vehicles. Supported Toyota models include the Camry (2002–2017), Sienna (2004–2016), Highlander (2004–2019), RAV4 (2006–2018), Solara (2002–2008), and Avalon (2005–2018). Lexus coverage includes RX330, RX350, ES330, ES350, and NX200t, plus the Scion xB and tC, and the Pontiac Vibe. Always cross-reference your exact year, engine size, and trim level before purchasing to confirm fitment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does this starter motor come with mounting hardware or a warranty card?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e This specific unit does not include mounting hardware or warranty documentation, as noted in the grading report. The starter motor unit itself is included and fully functional. Buyers will need to source compatible mounting bolts separately, which are widely available at auto parts stores. The original Boatrip product carries a 2-year manufacturer warranty, but documentation is not present with this listing — please factor that in when ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e How difficult is it to install this replacement starter motor?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Installation difficulty varies by vehicle, but this starter motor is designed for straightforward drop-in replacement. The standardized production dimensions ensure precise fitment without the need for modifications or adaptor hardware. Most experienced DIY mechanics can complete the swap in under two hours with basic hand tools. For those less familiar with automotive repair, a professional installation is always a sound option to ensure correct torque specs and wiring connections.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e What quality certifications does Boatrip hold for this product?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e Boatrip's manufacturing facility obtained ISO\/TS16949 quality system certification in 2008. They later updated this to the more rigorous IATF 16949:2016 standard, which governs quality management in the automotive supply chain. The factory has also successfully implemented the VRT quality management system, a program promoted by Ford across production processes. These certifications reflect consistent manufacturing standards and provide confidence in the reliability of the starter motor components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 5:\u003c\/strong\u003e What does the Urban Supply Plus inspection cover for this item?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 5:\u003c\/strong\u003e Urban Supply Plus staff performed a hands-on inspection of this starter motor prior to listing. The inspection confirmed that the drive pinion spins freely in one direction, solenoid terminals (S and B posts) are intact, the solenoid plunger moves smoothly, and the motor visually passes for no cracked housing or broken mounting ears. Part number 281000A010 was verified against fitment references. The unit is graded B — fully functional with minor cosmetic wear as documented in the product photos.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Which vehicles is this starter motor compatible with?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This Boatrip YWD8001 starter motor covers a wide range of popular vehicles. Supported Toyota models include the Camry (2002–2017), Sienna (2004–2016), Highlander (2004–2019), RAV4 (2006–2018), Solara (2002–2008), and Avalon (2005–2018). Lexus coverage includes RX330, RX350, ES330, ES350, and NX200t, plus the Scion xB and tC, and the Pontiac Vibe. Always cross-reference your exact year, engine size, and trim level before purchasing to confirm fitment.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does this starter motor come with mounting hardware or a warranty card?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This specific unit does not include mounting hardware or warranty documentation, as noted in the grading report. The starter motor unit itself is included and fully functional. Buyers will need to source compatible mounting bolts separately, which are widely available at auto parts stores. The original Boatrip product carries a 2-year manufacturer warranty, but documentation is not present with this listing — please factor that in when ordering.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How difficult is it to install this replacement starter motor?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Installation difficulty varies by vehicle, but this starter motor is designed for straightforward drop-in replacement. The standardized production dimensions ensure precise fitment without the need for modifications or adaptor hardware. Most experienced DIY mechanics can complete the swap in under two hours with basic hand tools. For those less familiar with automotive repair, a professional installation is always a sound option to ensure correct torque specs and wiring connections.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What quality certifications does Boatrip hold for this product?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Boatrip's manufacturing facility obtained ISO\/TS16949 quality system certification in 2008. They later updated this to the more rigorous IATF 16949:2016 standard, which governs quality management in the automotive supply chain. The factory has also successfully implemented the VRT quality management system, a program promoted by Ford across production processes. These certifications reflect consistent manufacturing standards and provide confidence in the reliability of the starter motor components.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does the Urban Supply Plus inspection cover for this item?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Urban Supply Plus staff performed a hands-on inspection of this starter motor prior to listing. The inspection confirmed that the drive pinion spins freely in one direction, solenoid terminals (S and B posts) are intact, the solenoid plunger moves smoothly, and the motor visually passes for no cracked housing or broken mounting ears. Part number 281000A010 was verified against fitment references. The unit is graded B — fully functional with minor cosmetic wear as documented in the product photos.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis Boatrip starter motor represents an excellent value for anyone replacing a failed or worn-out unit. The Toyota and Lexus vehicles on the compatibility list are among the most popular on the road today. Finding an affordable, tested replacement starter for these models is a practical priority. This unit skips the new-part markup while delivering the same functional reliability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe motor's OEM-spec engineering means no guesswork about output, pinion tooth count, or solenoid voltage draw. The part number 281000A010 is a recognized reference for this Toyota fitment group. Installers familiar with this platform will recognize the form factor immediately. It bolts into the same location as the factory unit without special brackets or shims.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you drive a Camry, a RAV4, or a Highlander, keeping a reliable starter motor in the drivetrain is essential. A failed starter leaves you stranded — a properly spec'd replacement gets you back on the road fast. This Boatrip unit gives you that dependable replacement at a budget-friendly price point. Shop with confidence knowing this item has been physically inspected and graded by our team before shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin-bottom: 16px; font-size: 14px;\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600; width: 140px;\"\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003eBoatrip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003eYWD8001\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eUPC\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003e739713968597\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"font-size: 12px; color: #888; border-top: 1px solid #eee; padding-top: 10px; margin-top: 16px;\"\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eUrban Supply Plus\u003c\/strong\u003e · Every item professionally inspected \u0026amp; graded\n   · SKU LPNPMUU5881621\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Boatrip","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":49146385662187,"sku":"LPNPMUU5881621","price":22.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/item11661_22887e85a011.jpg?v=1785791575"},{"product_id":"wedding-arch-flowers-kit","title":"Ling's Moment Wedding Arch Flowers Kit — Artificial Floral Backdrop Set","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, 'Segoe UI', Roboto, sans-serif; color: #333; max-width: 680px; margin: 0 auto;\"\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"display: inline-block; background: #1a1a1a; color: #d4af37; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13px; padding: 4px 14px; border-radius: 4px; margin-bottom: 12px; letter-spacing: 1px;\"\u003e\n  GRADE: C — Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Green cable ties\/fastener straps are missing from the set.\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"font-size: 15px; line-height: 1.7; margin-bottom: 16px;\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Green cable ties\/fastener straps are missing from the set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis Ling's Moment wedding arch flowers kit brings romantic, garden-inspired style to any ceremony backdrop. The set includes foam and silk artificial roses in white and beige tones. It is a versatile four-piece collection designed for arches, walls, and more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe kit contains four distinct pieces for a full arch display. First, a large corner flower swag measures 39.4 inches long by 29.1 inches wide. It is generously sized to drape across a full arch corner. Second, a tie-back flower piece measures 30 inches long by 6 inches wide. This piece adds a focused floral accent to posts or side columns. Third, a white sheer chiffon drape is included in the set. Fourth, a nude chiffon drape completes the fabric portion of the kit. Both drapes are stored in organza drawstring bags, as shown in the product photos. All four pieces work together for a cohesive ceremony look. The flexible base design fits straight, curved, circular, angled, and hexagon arch frames. This adaptability makes it easy to use with a wide variety of arch styles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe artificial flowers are crafted from high-quality foam and silk materials. Foam roses deliver a realistic, soft-petal appearance that photographs beautifully. Silk blooms and foliage add dimension and a smooth, lifelike texture. The arrangement visible in the photos features blush, ivory, and white roses. Gold-accented glitter leaves add a subtle shimmer throughout the swag. Pampas grass sprays add a modern boho touch to the overall design. Eucalyptus-style leaves fill in negative space naturally and elegantly. The color palette centers on white and beige, with warm gold and blush accents. These tones suit spring, summer, and fall wedding themes equally well. The flowers are also waterproof, making them suitable for outdoor settings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSetup is straightforward even without the included cable ties. The flexible wire base bends to conform to your specific arch shape. Standard zip ties or floral wire — both easy to source — work as substitutes. The swag attaches quickly to wood, metal, or PVC arch frames. No tools or special hardware are required for installation. The flower arrangement can also be mounted flat against a wall or backdrop panel. This dual-use design extends value well beyond a single wedding event. After the ceremony, the pieces work beautifully as home wall decor. The chiffon drapes can adorn stair railings, mantels, or table runners. Repurposing the set helps maximize your investment over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe floral swag is an excellent choice for ceremony arches and chuppahs. It also suits bridal shower backdrops, baby showers, and engagement parties. The neutral white and beige palette pairs easily with most color schemes. Photographers appreciate the soft, muted tones for flattering editorial-style shots. Event planners often re-use artificial floral sets across multiple events. This set holds its shape well between uses when stored carefully. The organza bags shown in the photos are ideal for dust-free storage. The drapes shake out smoothly after being folded in storage bags. Minor wrinkles in chiffon can be removed with a light steam. The overall condition is fair, with cosmetic wear consistent with prior use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCondition: Used - Fair — the flowers and drapes show visible cosmetic wear consistent with prior use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCompleteness note: The green cable ties or fastener straps normally included in this kit are missing from this set. Standard zip ties or craft wire are easy, inexpensive substitutes readily available at any hardware store.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more about artificial flower craftsmanship and materials on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Artificial_flower\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\"\u003eWikipedia's Artificial Flower article\u003c\/a\u003e. For more wedding and event decor inspiration, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our Home Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are the artificial flowers waterproof for outdoor use?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e These wedding arch flowers are crafted with waterproof foam and silk materials. They hold up well in light outdoor conditions such as garden ceremonies or covered outdoor venues. It is still advisable to avoid prolonged direct rain exposure to preserve the best appearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e What type of arch frame is compatible with this floral kit?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e The swag and tie-back piece are built on a flexible wire base that bends to fit many frame shapes. Straight, curved, circular, angled, and hexagon arch frames are all compatible designs. Wood, metal, and PVC arch materials all work well with standard zip ties or floral wire as fasteners.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can this set be used for events other than weddings?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e This floral kit is highly versatile beyond the wedding ceremony itself. The flower pieces work as photo backdrop decor, baby shower decorations, or bridal shower displays. The chiffon drapes can be repurposed on stair railings, table runners, curtain panels, or as elegant room accents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e What are the exact dimensions of each piece in the kit?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e The large corner flower swag measures 39.4 inches long by 29.1 inches wide. The tie-back flower piece measures 30 inches long by 6 inches wide. Both chiffon drapes are full-length panels stored in organza drawstring bags as shown in the product photos.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Are the artificial flowers waterproof for outdoor use?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"These wedding arch flowers are crafted with waterproof foam and silk materials. They hold up well in light outdoor conditions such as garden ceremonies or covered outdoor venues. It is still advisable to avoid prolonged direct rain exposure to preserve the best appearance.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What type of arch frame is compatible with this floral kit?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The swag and tie-back piece are built on a flexible wire base that bends to fit many frame shapes. Straight, curved, circular, angled, and hexagon arch frames are all compatible designs. Wood, metal, and PVC arch materials all work well with standard zip ties or floral wire as fasteners.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Can this set be used for events other than weddings?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This floral kit is highly versatile beyond the wedding ceremony itself. The flower pieces work as photo backdrop decor, baby shower decorations, or bridal shower displays. The chiffon drapes can be repurposed on stair railings, table runners, curtain panels, or as elegant room accents.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What are the exact dimensions of each piece in the kit?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The large corner flower swag measures 39.4 inches long by 29.1 inches wide. The tie-back flower piece measures 30 inches long by 6 inches wide. Both chiffon drapes are full-length panels stored in organza drawstring bags as shown in the product photos.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis wedding arch flower set from Ling's Moment delivers real visual impact for a fraction of the new retail price. The artificial rose blooms photograph with impressive realism in both natural and studio lighting. The white and beige color palette keeps the arrangement timeless and broadly appealing. Artificial floral decor has grown significantly in popularity for weddings due to its durability and reusability. Unlike fresh flowers, this set will not wilt, shed petals, or require refrigeration before the event. Budget-conscious couples and event planners alike benefit from investing in reusable floral decor. This set offers a practical way to achieve a lush, professional arch display. The included chiffon drapes elevate the soft, romantic aesthetic of any arch or backdrop frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you are decorating for a spring garden wedding or a winter indoor ceremony, this arch floral kit adapts beautifully. The foam and silk construction gives the roses a convincing, lifelike appearance from any distance. Gold-glitter leaf accents catch the light and add a premium finishing touch to the arrangement. Pair this set with a complementary arch stand — sold separately — to complete the full ceremony look. With mindful storage after each use, this artificial wedding arch set can serve multiple events beautifully.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin-bottom: 16px; font-size: 14px;\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600; width: 140px;\"\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003eLing's moment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003eB0BSFBMNZG\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"font-size: 12px; color: #888; border-top: 1px solid #eee; padding-top: 10px; margin-top: 16px;\"\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eUrban Supply Plus\u003c\/strong\u003e · Every item professionally inspected \u0026amp; graded\n   · SKU LPNO494872612\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Ling's moment","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":49146447266027,"sku":"LPNO494872612","price":33.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/item20978_ce02ed63fa2c.jpg?v=1785793184"},{"product_id":"elejoy-solar-panel-tester","title":"Elejoy EY1800W Solar Panel Tester — MPPT Multimeter \u0026 Watt Meter","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, 'Segoe UI', Roboto, sans-serif; color: #333; max-width: 680px; margin: 0 auto;\"\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"display: inline-block; background: #1a1a1a; color: #d4af37; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13px; padding: 4px 14px; border-radius: 4px; margin-bottom: 12px; letter-spacing: 1px;\"\u003e\n  GRADE: B — Used - Good. Fully functional with normal wear. Visible cosmetic wear.\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"font-size: 15px; line-height: 1.7; margin-bottom: 16px;\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. Fully functional with normal wear. Visible cosmetic wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Elejoy EY1800W solar panel tester is a professional-grade MPPT multimeter built for field diagnostics. It measures power output, open circuit voltage, and short circuit current in real time. This portable solar tester is an essential tool for anyone maintaining or commissioning photovoltaic systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe EY1800W is rated for panels up to 1800W. It handles voltages from 20V to 120V DC. Current capacity spans 0 to 60A. These specs cover the vast majority of residential and small commercial solar arrays. The tester connects directly to a panel — no external batteries required. Power is drawn entirely from the panel under test. This makes it genuinely grab-and-go ready for rooftop or ground-mount work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe front panel features three dedicated buttons. The AUTO MPPT button triggers an automatic sweep to find the maximum power point. The MANUAL MPPT button lets you step through the I-V curve yourself. The BACKLIGHT button illuminates the LCD for low-light conditions. The clear LCD readout displays voltage, current, and wattage simultaneously. Readings are stable and update in real time without flickering. The display is large enough to read comfortably in direct sunlight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConnecting the tester to a panel is straightforward. The included MC-4 cables plug directly into standard PV connectors. Alligator clip cables offer an alternative connection method for bare wire terminals. Both cable sets use color-coded red and black conductors. The banana jack inputs on the side of the unit accept both connector types. Polarity is clearly marked to prevent reverse connection errors. The MC-4 connectors lock securely with an audible click. The alligator clips grip firmly and maintain a solid electrical contact.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the MPPT function gives you far more insight than a basic multimeter. A standard multimeter only measures Voc and Isc under open or short conditions. The EY1800W sweeps the full I-V curve to locate true Pmax. This is the actual power the panel delivers to a load. Comparing Pmax to the panel's nameplate rating reveals real-world efficiency. Degraded cells, shading losses, and wiring faults all show up clearly in the output. Solar installers use this data to validate new installations. Maintenance crews use it to identify underperforming panels in an array. The tester makes it easy to compare multiple panels side by side.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCondition: Used - Good condition — visible light scratches are present on the front panel face and button area. The LCD screen, housing structure, and all ports are fully intact. The unit powers on and operates without fault. All measurement functions — Voc, Isc, Pmax, and MPPT sweep — have been verified as working. The EVA carry case, MC-4 cables, alligator clip cables, and user manual are all present and in clean condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe EVA hard-shell carry case is a standout feature for field technicians. It zips closed to protect the tester and all accessories during transport. The molded interior keeps cables organized and prevents connector damage. The case is compact enough to fit in a tool bag alongside other instruments. The wrist strap makes it easy to carry up a ladder or across a roof. Elejoy designed the EY1800W with portability as a primary goal. The lightweight body and protective case reflect that design intent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more about how solar photovoltaic testing works on the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Solar_panel\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia Solar Panel reference page\u003c\/a\u003e. Understanding I-V curve characteristics helps you get the most out of this solar tester.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more professional-grade measuring and diagnostic instruments in our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/tools\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our Tools Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does this solar panel tester require batteries to operate?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e The EY1800W draws its operating power directly from the solar panel being tested. There are no internal batteries to charge or replace. Simply connect the MC-4 cables or alligator clips to the panel and the MPPT multimeter powers on automatically.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e What types of solar panels is the EY1800W compatible with?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e The tester is designed for panels with a voltage rating of 20V to 120V DC and up to 60A current. This covers most standard residential monocrystalline and polycrystalline solar panels. The manufacturer specifies it should not be used on systems exceeding 120V or 1800W output.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the difference between AUTO MPPT and MANUAL MPPT modes?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e AUTO MPPT mode automatically sweeps the full I-V curve and reports the maximum power point without any manual input. MANUAL MPPT mode lets the technician step through the curve incrementally for closer inspection of specific operating points. Both modes display Pmax, voltage at Pmax, and current at Pmax on the LCD screen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e What accessories are included with this used tester?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e This unit ships with the complete original accessory set. Included items are the MC-4 connecting cables, alligator clip cables, the EVA hard-shell carry case, and the printed user manual. All accessories were inspected and confirmed to be present and functional before listing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 5:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I use this tester to diagnose a faulty panel in an existing array?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 5:\u003c\/strong\u003e The EY1800W is well suited for that exact purpose. By measuring and comparing Pmax values across individual panels, a technician can quickly identify which panel is underperforming relative to the others. This MPPT multimeter approach is far more accurate than voltage-only testing for finding degraded cells or partial shading issues.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does this solar panel tester require batteries to operate?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The EY1800W draws its operating power directly from the solar panel being tested. There are no internal batteries to charge or replace. Simply connect the MC-4 cables or alligator clips to the panel and the MPPT multimeter powers on automatically.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What types of solar panels is the EY1800W compatible with?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The tester is designed for panels with a voltage rating of 20V to 120V DC and up to 60A current. This covers most standard residential monocrystalline and polycrystalline solar panels. The manufacturer specifies it should not be used on systems exceeding 120V or 1800W output.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between AUTO MPPT and MANUAL MPPT modes?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"AUTO MPPT mode automatically sweeps the full I-V curve and reports the maximum power point without any manual input. MANUAL MPPT mode lets the technician step through the curve incrementally for closer inspection of specific operating points. Both modes display Pmax, voltage at Pmax, and current at Pmax on the LCD screen.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What accessories are included with this used tester?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This unit ships with the complete original accessory set. Included items are the MC-4 connecting cables, alligator clip cables, the EVA hard-shell carry case, and the printed user manual. All accessories were inspected and confirmed to be present and functional before listing.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Can I use this tester to diagnose a faulty panel in an existing array?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The EY1800W is well suited for that exact purpose. By measuring and comparing Pmax values across individual panels, a technician can quickly identify which panel is underperforming relative to the others. This MPPT multimeter approach is far more accurate than voltage-only testing for finding degraded cells or partial shading issues.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Elejoy EY1800W solar panel tester is a smart buy for both professional installers and serious DIY solar enthusiasts. At a fraction of the cost of new, this used-good unit delivers the same reliable MPPT measurement capability. The complete accessory kit means you can take it directly to a job site without sourcing any additional cables or adapters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSolar energy system owners benefit greatly from having a dedicated solar tester on hand. Periodic testing reveals panel degradation before it significantly impacts system output. Catching a failing panel early can prevent energy loss and protect downstream charge controllers or inverters. The EY1800W makes that routine testing fast, accurate, and completely battery-free.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you are verifying new panel output at commissioning or troubleshooting an underperforming rooftop array, this MPPT multimeter gives you the data you need. The portable form factor, rugged EVA case, and no-battery operation make it one of the most practical solar diagnostic tools available at this price point.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin-bottom: 16px; font-size: 14px;\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600; width: 140px;\"\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003eelejoy\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003eEY1800w\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eUPC\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003e635411175032\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"font-size: 12px; color: #888; border-top: 1px solid #eee; padding-top: 10px; margin-top: 16px;\"\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eUrban Supply Plus\u003c\/strong\u003e · Every item professionally inspected \u0026amp; graded\n   · SKU LPNO463106043\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"elejoy","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":49146457063659,"sku":"LPNO463106043","price":39.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/item11077_94a46ea26fb3.jpg?v=1785794422"},{"product_id":"sulwhasoo-cleansing-foam","title":"Sulwhasoo Gentle Cleansing Foam EX 200ml — Botanical Face Wash","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, 'Segoe UI', Roboto, sans-serif; color: #333; max-width: 680px; margin: 0 auto;\"\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"display: inline-block; background: #1a1a1a; color: #d4af37; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13px; padding: 4px 14px; border-radius: 4px; margin-bottom: 12px; letter-spacing: 1px;\"\u003e\n  GRADE: B — Used - Good. Fully functional with normal wear. Pump seal is broken\/previously used; fill level appears full with no damage to bottle or box; product insert missing.\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"font-size: 15px; line-height: 1.7; margin-bottom: 16px;\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. Fully functional with normal wear. Pump seal is broken\/previously used; fill level appears full with no damage to bottle or box; product insert missing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Sulwhasoo Gentle Cleansing Foam EX is a premium Korean skincare staple. It delivers a rich, hydrating cleanse powered by botanical ingredients. This 200ml pump bottle offers generous value for a luxury face wash. The formula is ideal for daily morning and evening use. It suits a wide range of skin types seeking gentle yet thorough cleansing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSulwhasoo is a leading Korean luxury beauty brand. Its skincare philosophy is rooted in traditional Asian herbal medicine. The Gentle Cleansing Foam EX reflects that heritage beautifully. Key botanical ingredients include duckweed extract and chestnut inner shell extract. These ingredients are known for their skin-conditioning and moisture-retention properties. Duckweed is celebrated in K-beauty for its hydrating benefits. Chestnut shell extract helps support a calm, smooth skin surface. Together they create a cleansing experience that feels nourishing. The formula does not strip the skin of its natural oils. Skin feels balanced and soft immediately after rinsing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cleansing foam uses nonionic surfactant technology. This allows the formula to build rich, stable, abundant lather with ease. You simply pump twice onto your palm and add water. Work the product into a dense foam before applying to the face. The foam structure helps lift impurities effectively. It reaches into pores without aggressive scrubbing. Rinse thoroughly with lukewarm water for best results. The cleansing action is gentle enough for sensitive skin. It removes daily grime, light makeup, and excess sebum. The result is a thoroughly clean yet comfortable base for skincare layering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOne of the standout qualities of this foam is its post-cleanse moisture feel. Many cleansers leave the face tight or dry after washing. This formula is specifically engineered to leave a moisture layer behind. That layer supports subsequent toner and serum absorption. Skin feels supple and relaxed long after rinsing. This moisturizing benefit is especially valued in multi-step K-beauty routines. Regular use helps maintain the skin's natural hydration balance. It also gently addresses dull or rough texture over time. Dead skin cells are softened and removed without overstimulation. The skin surface becomes progressively smoother with continued use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe bottle itself is a classic clear pump format. It allows you to see the remaining product level at a glance. Photos confirm the fill level appears full with no damage to the bottle. The pump mechanism is functional and dispenses cleanly. The outer box shows normal light handling wear consistent with a Grade B item. No damage to the bottle itself is visible in the product photos. The batch code stamped on both the box and bottle base reads LE8108, with an expiry of April 2028. This gives substantial remaining shelf life for confident purchase. The product is made in Korea by Amorepacific Corp and is available internationally.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis cleanser pairs naturally with other Sulwhasoo products. It works as an ideal first step before applying essence, serum, or moisturizer. It is also suitable as a standalone daily cleanser for those who prefer a simpler routine. The pH-balanced formula makes it appropriate for morning and evening use. Fragrance is included in the formula, so those with fragrance sensitivity should review ingredient photos before purchase. The full ingredient list is visible on the box side panel in the product photos. For more information on Korean skincare cleansing routines, visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Korean_beauty_products\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eKorean beauty products Wikipedia page\u003c\/a\u003e. Explore more options in our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our Personal Care Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e What skin types is the Sulwhasoo Gentle Cleansing Foam EX suitable for?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e This cleansing foam is formulated with gentle nonionic surfactants that make it appropriate for a broad range of skin types. It is particularly well-suited for normal, combination, and dry skin that benefits from extra hydration during cleansing. Those with sensitive skin may also find it gentle enough for daily use, though reviewing the ingredient list is recommended for those with known fragrance sensitivity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the product fill level affected by previous pump use?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e The pump seal on this unit has been previously broken, meaning the pump has been actuated before. However, photos clearly show the fill level appears full with no visible depletion of product. The bottle itself shows no damage, cracks, or leakage. Buyers can feel confident they are receiving substantially all of the original 200ml volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e How should this cleansing foam be used for best results?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Dispense two pumps onto your palm and add a small amount of water to begin lathering. Work the product into a rich, dense foam before applying it to a wet face. Gently massage the foam in circular motions, then rinse thoroughly with lukewarm water to remove all residue.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the expiry date on this product?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e The batch code LE8108 and expiry date stamped on both the outer box and the bottle base indicate the product expires in April 2028. This means it has substantial remaining shelf life from the time of purchase. Storing the product away from direct sunlight and heat will help maintain optimal formula quality through that date.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 5:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the product insert or instruction booklet included?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 5:\u003c\/strong\u003e The product insert that originally accompanied this item is missing and is not included with this listing. Usage instructions are printed directly on the outer box, which is included, so guidance on how to use the cleansing foam is still readily available. Buyers can also reference Sulwhasoo's official website at www.sulwhasoo.com for detailed usage information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What skin types is the Sulwhasoo Gentle Cleansing Foam EX suitable for?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This cleansing foam is formulated with gentle nonionic surfactants that make it appropriate for a broad range of skin types. It is particularly well-suited for normal, combination, and dry skin that benefits from extra hydration during cleansing. Those with sensitive skin may also find it gentle enough for daily use, though reviewing the ingredient list is recommended for those with known fragrance sensitivity.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is the product fill level affected by previous pump use?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The pump seal on this unit has been previously broken, meaning the pump has been actuated before. However, photos clearly show the fill level appears full with no visible depletion of product. The bottle itself shows no damage, cracks, or leakage. Buyers can feel confident they are receiving substantially all of the original 200ml volume.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should this cleansing foam be used for best results?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Dispense two pumps onto your palm and add a small amount of water to begin lathering. Work the product into a rich, dense foam before applying it to a wet face. Gently massage the foam in circular motions, then rinse thoroughly with lukewarm water to remove all residue.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the expiry date on this product?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The batch code LE8108 and expiry date stamped on both the outer box and the bottle base indicate the product expires in April 2028. This means it has substantial remaining shelf life from the time of purchase. Storing the product away from direct sunlight and heat will help maintain optimal formula quality through that date.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is the product insert or instruction booklet included?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The product insert that originally accompanied this item is missing and is not included with this listing. Usage instructions are printed directly on the outer box, which is included, so guidance on how to use the cleansing foam is still readily available. Buyers can also reference Sulwhasoo's official website at www.sulwhasoo.com for detailed usage information.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Sulwhasoo Gentle Cleansing Foam EX stands out in the crowded face wash market. Its botanical formulation reflects decades of Korean herbal skincare expertise. The moisturizing performance after cleansing is a true differentiator. Many users report that their skin feels conditioned rather than stripped. This makes the foam an excellent anchor for any hydration-focused skincare routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePurchasing this item at a reduced price offers access to a premium cleansing experience. The bottle condition is good, and the foam itself remains fully intact. Condition-wise, the item shows normal wear consistent with a previously opened product. Pump function is normal and delivers product cleanly with each press. It is a smart way to experience a luxury Korean skincare brand at a savings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone building or refining a Korean beauty skincare regimen, this botanical cleansing foam is an excellent foundation. Its gentle formula, long-lasting moisturizing effect, and rich lathering capability make it a versatile daily essential. The 200ml size provides plenty of product for extended daily use morning and night.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin-bottom: 16px; font-size: 14px;\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600; width: 140px;\"\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003eSulwhasoo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003eI0088602\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"font-size: 12px; color: #888; border-top: 1px solid #eee; padding-top: 10px; margin-top: 16px;\"\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eUrban Supply Plus\u003c\/strong\u003e · Every item professionally inspected \u0026amp; graded\n   · SKU LPNO516950487\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Sulwhasoo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":49146458079467,"sku":"LPNO516950487","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/item22645_d066cac1671c.jpg?v=1785794477"},{"product_id":"sensationnel-bare-lace-wig","title":"Sensationnel Bare Lace 13x6 Wig — Curly 1B, Fair Grade","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, 'Segoe UI', Roboto, sans-serif; color: #333; max-width: 680px; margin: 0 auto;\"\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"display: inline-block; background: #1a1a1a; color: #d4af37; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13px; padding: 4px 14px; border-radius: 4px; margin-bottom: 12px; letter-spacing: 1px;\"\u003e\n  GRADE: C — Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Visible frizz and fiber damage throughout, signs of previous wear; missing wig cap\/mesh cap insert and original retail packaging; model label not confirmed inside cap.\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"font-size: 15px; line-height: 1.7; margin-bottom: 16px;\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Visible frizz and fiber damage throughout, signs of previous wear; missing wig cap\/mesh cap insert and original retail packaging; model label not confirmed inside cap.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis Sensationnel Bare Lace 13x6 glueless synthetic wig offers a deeply discounted entry into a premium lace-front style. The wig is sold as-is in used-fair condition, ideal for buyers comfortable with restyling or crafting projects. The curly 1B Offblack fiber delivers rich, dark volume at a fraction of the original retail price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Sensationnel Bare Lace line is built around an advanced lace engineering system. The 13x6 lace frontal spans ear to ear for a wide, natural-looking hairline. The lace grid is 20% larger in pattern than standard lace designs. The lace itself is 40% thinner than conventional frontal lace. This combination creates a transparent, non-reflective finish. The result mimics a natural scalp appearance very closely. The pre-plucked hairline with baby hair adds extra realism. This wig style is specifically designed to eliminate lifting at the edges.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cap construction features a breathable mesh base for airflow and comfort. A built-in glueless wig band sits along the interior perimeter. Silicone lining grips the head without adhesive or tape. This design makes the wig beginner-friendly and easy to install solo. The adjustable strap at the nape allows a custom fit. The cap is described as small-to-big head friendly. No special tools or professional help are needed to wear this wig. The glueless system is ideal for protective styling rotation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe fiber style on this unit is a tight, voluminous curl pattern. The curls run from root to tip throughout the length. The color is 1B Offblack, a deep near-black with natural undertones. Sensationnel offers this style in a range of textures including straight, wavy, and curly. This particular unit is the curly variation. Volume is full and dramatic even in its current pre-owned state. The lace at the part line is visible and intact in the photos. Photos show the actual unit you will receive — please review all images carefully.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUsed - Fair condition means this wig shows visible signs of previous wear. Visible frizz and fiber damage are present throughout the unit. The fibers have lost some of their original definition and smoothness. The exterior lace frontal area shows typical wear from prior use. Completeness note: the original retail packaging is missing, and the internal mesh cap insert is absent. The wig cap structure, lace, adjustable strap, and comb attachments are all present and functional as seen in the photos.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBuyers who are experienced with wig care and fiber restoration may find significant value here. Synthetic wigs can sometimes be refreshed using fabric softener steam methods or light detangling. This wig may serve well as a styling practice piece or a budget costume option. The lace front structure remains usable for low-adhesive or tape-free wear. At this price point, the Sensationnel Bare Lace unit offers strong structural value. Learn more about synthetic wig construction and care on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Wig\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia's Wig article\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more discounted haircare and beauty items in our store. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our Personal Care Collection\u003c\/a\u003e for additional savings on top brands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e What does \"used - fair\" condition mean for this wig?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - fair condition indicates the wig has been previously worn and shows visible cosmetic wear. In this case, the fibers display frizz and some fiber damage throughout the unit. The wig remains structurally functional, meaning the lace, cap, straps, and combs are all intact and usable. Buyers should review all product photos carefully before purchasing to understand the exact condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this wig missing any parts or accessories?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e The original retail packaging and the internal mesh cap insert are not included with this unit. The core wig structure — including the lace frontal, mesh cap base, glueless wig band, silicone lining, adjustable strap, and interior combs — is present and visible in the photos. Buyers who use the wig without an internal cap insert may find the glueless band and silicone lining sufficient for secure wear. No other major components appear to be missing based on our inspection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can this wig be restyled or refreshed at home?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Synthetic fiber wigs have limitations compared to human hair when it comes to restyling. Heat styling with standard tools is generally not recommended for synthetic fibers unless they are heat-resistant grade. However, light detangling with a wide-tooth comb and a synthetic wig conditioner spray can help manage frizz on units like this one. Some buyers use cool-water rinse methods or fabric softener soaks to restore softness to worn synthetic fibers. Results will vary depending on the extent of the fiber damage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the 13x6 lace frontal measurement?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e The 13x6 measurement refers to the dimensions of the lace panel at the front of the wig. The lace spans 13 inches across from ear to ear. It extends 6 inches back from the hairline toward the crown. This larger lace area allows for more versatile parting options compared to a standard 4x4 or 13x4 frontal. The wider lace zone makes it easier to create deep side parts, middle parts, or pulled-back styles that expose the hairline.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Sensationnel brand has a long-standing reputation in the synthetic hair industry. Their Bare Lace collection was specifically engineered to address common complaints about visible lace. The thinner, larger-grid lace technology makes this frontal one of the more realistic-looking synthetic options available. Even in a used-fair state, the engineering of this glueless wig cap sets it apart from basic fashion wigs. Buyers looking for a lace-front wig at a steep discount will find this unit worth considering for craft, cosplay, or everyday wear with restyling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis listing is for the exact unit shown in the four product photos above. The curly 1B Offblack color is rich and dark with natural dimension. The lace parting space is visible and intact in photo four. The interior cap construction is clearly shown in photos two and three. Please examine all images before completing your purchase. All sales of used-fair items from Urban Supply Plus are final, and we encourage buyers to ask any questions prior to ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does 'used - fair' condition mean for this wig?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Used - fair condition indicates the wig has been previously worn and shows visible cosmetic wear. In this case, the fibers display frizz and some fiber damage throughout the unit. The wig remains structurally functional, meaning the lace, cap, straps, and combs are all intact and usable. Buyers should review all product photos carefully before purchasing to understand the exact condition.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is this wig missing any parts or accessories?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The original retail packaging and the internal mesh cap insert are not included with this unit. The core wig structure — including the lace frontal, mesh cap base, glueless wig band, silicone lining, adjustable strap, and interior combs — is present and visible in the photos. Buyers who use the wig without an internal cap insert may find the glueless band and silicone lining sufficient for secure wear. No other major components appear to be missing based on our inspection.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Can this wig be restyled or refreshed at home?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Synthetic fiber wigs have limitations compared to human hair when it comes to restyling. Heat styling with standard tools is generally not recommended for synthetic fibers unless they are heat-resistant grade. However, light detangling with a wide-tooth comb and a synthetic wig conditioner spray can help manage frizz on units like this one. Some buyers use cool-water rinse methods or fabric softener soaks to restore softness to worn synthetic fibers. Results will vary depending on the extent of the fiber damage.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the 13x6 lace frontal measurement?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The 13x6 measurement refers to the dimensions of the lace panel at the front of the wig. The lace spans 13 inches across from ear to ear. It extends 6 inches back from the hairline toward the crown. This larger lace area allows for more versatile parting options compared to a standard 4x4 or 13x4 frontal. The wider lace zone makes it easier to create deep side parts, middle parts, or pulled-back styles that expose the hairline.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin-bottom: 16px; font-size: 14px;\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600; width: 140px;\"\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003eSensationnel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003eBL136002-1B\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eUPC\u003c\/td\u003e\n  \u003ctd style=\"padding: 6px 12px; border-bottom: 1px solid #eee;\"\u003e080386856798\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"font-size: 12px; color: #888; border-top: 1px solid #eee; padding-top: 10px; margin-top: 16px;\"\u003e\n  \u003cstrong\u003eUrban Supply Plus\u003c\/strong\u003e · Every item professionally inspected \u0026amp; graded\n   · SKU LPNO452932787\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Sensationnel","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":49150474879211,"sku":"LPNO452932787","price":11.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/item12352_94ef5ccc89db.jpg?v=1785846562"},{"product_id":"katutude-7-carplay-android-auto-stereo-dodge-dakota-2005-2011","title":"Katutude ZESS-07-YFP-0181 7\" CarPlay Android Auto Stereo Dodge Dakota 2005–2011","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: C\u003c\/strong\u003e — Used – fair. Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Fascia\/trim panel frame missing; unit and all other accessories present with no visible cosmetic damage; linked to a previous owner's Google account at time of inspection.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Fascia\/trim panel frame missing; unit and all other accessories present with no visible cosmetic damage; linked to a previous owner's Google account at time of inspection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis Katutude 7-inch CarPlay stereo is purpose-built for the Dodge Dakota. It fits model years 2005 through 2011 with a seamless double-din integration. The unit runs Android 14 and supports both wireless and wired CarPlay. Android Auto is also supported in both wired and wireless modes. All major accessories are present and included with this listing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe 7-inch HD touchscreen is the centerpiece of this stereo. The display is bright and responsive under normal use. Touch controls are laid out along both sides of the screen. Physical buttons for power, volume, and navigation are also present on the face. The screen protector film is still in place from the factory. Overall screen condition shows no scratches or cracks. The front panel bezel is intact and undamaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAndroid 14 powers the system with a quad-core CPU. RAM is 2GB and internal storage is 32GB. This gives the unit enough headroom for smooth app performance. You can install apps directly from the built-in app store. Google Maps, Waze, and HERE Maps are all supported for navigation. The unit also supports offline map downloads after a WiFi connection is established. Mirror Link allows you to cast your phone screen to the display.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stereo includes a built-in WiFi module for internet connectivity. Bluetooth is onboard for hands-free calling and wireless audio streaming. FM and RDS radio are supported out of the box. You can access real-time traffic, news, and weather via FM\/RDS broadcasts. Multiple EQ presets let you tune audio output to your preference. The unit also supports a subwoofer line output, visible on the labeled RCA cable harness included. Two USB ports are available for charging and data input.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn AHD rear-view camera is included in the accessory bundle. The camera is waterproof and features wide-angle and night-vision capability. It connects via the included RCA composite cable, also pictured. When the vehicle is placed in reverse, the display automatically switches to the camera feed. This makes parking in tight spaces significantly safer and easier. The yellow RCA connector on the rear of the unit is dedicated to the camera input. Steering wheel control integration is supported through the included wiring harness adapter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe included wiring harness adapter is bagged and labeled for easy identification. It is designed specifically for the Dodge Dakota double-din slot. Color-coded wires simplify the installation process for the Dakota platform. The external microphone cable with a 3.5mm connector is also included. This microphone enables clear hands-free calling via Bluetooth. The labeled RCA output harness includes front, rear, subwoofer, and video outputs. The Android Operating Manual booklet with FAQ guide is included for setup reference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more about in-vehicle infotainment technology on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/In-car_entertainment\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\"\u003eWikipedia's In-Car Entertainment page\u003c\/a\u003e. For more great deals on car audio and accessories, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our Automotive Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does this stereo fit the Dodge Dakota, and what years are compatible?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e This Katutude stereo is specifically designed for the Dodge Dakota double-din slot. It is compatible with model years 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, and 2011. The wiring harness adapter included in this listing is tailored to the Dakota's connector configuration. Professional installation is recommended to ensure a clean, seamless fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e What does the \"linked to a previous owner's Google account\" mean for the buyer?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e At the time of our inspection, the unit was logged into a prior owner's Google account on Android 14. This is a software state and does not affect the hardware or functionality of the stereo. A factory reset performed during installation will clear all prior account data. The buyer will then be able to sign in with their own Google account and configure the unit fresh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is wireless CarPlay supported, or does it require a cable?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e This touchscreen stereo supports both wireless and wired connections for Apple CarPlay. Wireless CarPlay allows iPhone users to connect without plugging in a Lightning or USB-C cable. Wired CarPlay via USB is also available as an alternative connection method. Android Auto functions the same way, supporting both wireless and wired modes depending on the connected device.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e What accessories are included with this used stereo?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e The unit comes with the stereo head unit, an AHD rear-view camera, and a vehicle-specific wiring harness adapter. Also included are an external microphone with 3.5mm jack, a labeled RCA audio and video output cable harness, a camera RCA composite cable, and the Android operating manual booklet. The fascia trim panel frame is missing and is not included. All other functional accessories are present as shown in the photos.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does this stereo fit the Dodge Dakota, and what years are compatible?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This Katutude stereo is specifically designed for the Dodge Dakota double-din slot. It is compatible with model years 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, and 2011. The wiring harness adapter included in this listing is tailored to the Dakota's connector configuration. Professional installation is recommended to ensure a clean, seamless fit.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does the 'linked to a previous owner's Google account' mean for the buyer?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"At the time of our inspection, the unit was logged into a prior owner's Google account on Android 14. This is a software state and does not affect the hardware or functionality of the stereo. A factory reset performed during installation will clear all prior account data. The buyer will then be able to sign in with their own Google account and configure the unit fresh.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is wireless CarPlay supported, or does it require a cable?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This touchscreen stereo supports both wireless and wired connections for Apple CarPlay. Wireless CarPlay allows iPhone users to connect without plugging in a Lightning or USB-C cable. Wired CarPlay via USB is also available as an alternative connection method. Android Auto functions the same way, supporting both wireless and wired modes depending on the connected device.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What accessories are included with this used stereo?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The unit comes with the stereo head unit, an AHD rear-view camera, and a vehicle-specific wiring harness adapter. Also included are an external microphone with 3.5mm jack, a labeled RCA audio and video output cable harness, a camera RCA composite cable, and the Android operating manual booklet. The fascia trim panel frame is missing and is not included. All other functional accessories are present as shown in the photos.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis CarPlay stereo represents a significant upgrade over the factory radio in a Dodge Dakota. The Android 14 platform means the software is current and capable. GPS navigation works both online and offline depending on your preference. The touchscreen interface is intuitive and easy to learn quickly. Bluetooth connectivity keeps your hands on the wheel during calls. The stereo also supports a driving recorder function for added road safety.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBuyers looking to modernize their dakota with CarPlay and Android Auto at a lower price will find this unit compelling. The condition is used and fair, meaning the stereo works as intended with cosmetic wear. The missing fascia frame should be sourced separately to complete the dashboard installation. A replacement trim frame for the Dodge Dakota double-din slot is widely available from third-party suppliers. The touchscreen glass itself is clean and undamaged based on inspection photos.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOverall this Katutude stereo packs a lot of technology into a value-priced package. CarPlay, Android Auto, GPS, Bluetooth, WiFi, and a rear camera are all included. The 2GB of RAM and 32GB of storage provide a smooth Android 14 experience. This touchscreen unit is a capable daily driver for any Dakota owner ready to upgrade.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Katutude","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":49412649582827,"sku":"LPNO491646298","price":30.32,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/ab0555d5da816841c4ed46416dc4f0a8.jpg?v=1789512674"},{"product_id":"quickwig-braided-curly-lace-front-wig-26-inch-boho","title":"quickwig Braided Curly Lace Front Wig — 26 Inch Boho","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: USED\u003c\/strong\u003e — Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Hair is noticeably messy\/tangled and shows signs of previous wear; all accessories (wig cap, adjustable straps, combs) are present and intact.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Hair is noticeably messy\/tangled and shows signs of previous wear; all accessories (wig cap, adjustable straps, combs) are present and intact.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis quickwig 26-inch braided curly lace front wig delivers a bold boho Fulani look. It features a 13x6 HD transparent lace front for a seamless scalp blend. The glueless design makes it easy for anyone to wear confidently at home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe wig comes pre-styled with handmade cornrow braids across the top. Loose curly waves cascade beautifully from the braided base. This 2-in-1 design gives you two distinct looks in one piece. The braided top creates a sleek, refined aesthetic. The flowing curls beneath add glamorous volume. You get a protective style without hours at the salon. Pre-crocheted baby hair frames the hairline naturally. The 13x6 lace area melts cleanly into a range of skin tones. No braiding skills are required to wear this wig. It is a true wear-and-go solution for busy lifestyles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe interior construction is built for comfort and a secure hold. Hand-braided cornrows underneath distribute weight evenly. Adjustable straps let you customize the fit to your head size. Secure combs at the front and sides grip without pulling. The anti-slip silicone band inside keeps the wig from shifting. No glue or adhesive is needed at any point. The cap construction is breathable and lightweight for all-day wear. The interior cap, straps, and combs are all present and functional. This glueless setup protects your natural edges and prevents traction alopecia. You can install and remove this wig completely on your own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe synthetic fiber used in this wig holds its curl pattern wash after wash. You will not need to re-braid or re-style after routine cleaning. The synthetic material is resistant to humidity-induced frizz when properly maintained. A wide-tooth comb or detangling brush can help restore the curls after wear. The color is a rich natural black (shade 1B). At 26 inches, the length falls well past the shoulders for a dramatic, full effect. The fiber is lightweight compared to many human hair alternatives. This makes the wig a budget-friendly way to maintain a protective style. Regular gentle detangling will help restore the hair to a neater appearance. The braided sections remain intact and well-defined despite prior use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis braided wig suits a wide range of occasions and styling preferences. It works well for everyday wear, special events, or protective styling between salon visits. The Fulani braid pattern draws from West African styling traditions and is widely celebrated. Learn more about the history and cultural significance of cornrow braiding on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Cornrow_(hairstyle)\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia's Cornrow article\u003c\/a\u003e. This style pairs well with hoops, headbands, and statement jewelry. The long curly ends can be pinned up or left flowing. Whether you prefer a sleek braided look or voluminous curls, this wig covers both. It is a versatile wardrobe staple for anyone who loves protective styling. The glueless installation keeps your natural hair safe underneath. Find more styles like this in our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our Personal Care Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis item shows visible signs of previous wear and some tangling in the curly sections. The braided portion at the crown is intact and well-structured. The lace front is present and undamaged. All included accessories — wig cap, adjustable straps, and interior combs — are confirmed present. Please review all product photos carefully before purchasing. The hair will benefit from a gentle detangling session before first use. This listing represents good value for a pre-owned braided lace wig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can this braided lace front wig be worn without glue?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e This wig is specifically designed for glueless wear. It uses adjustable straps, interior combs, and a silicone grip band to stay secure. No adhesive products are required for a comfortable, confident fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I detangle the curly sections after use?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e Start by misting the curly ends lightly with water or a detangling spray. Use a wide-tooth comb or your fingers to gently work through tangles from the tips upward. Avoid pulling from the root, as this can loosen the lace or damage the fiber.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does this wig include a wig cap?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e A wig cap is included with this listing and has been confirmed present during our grading inspection. The adjustable straps and interior combs are also included and intact. All core accessories needed for wear are accounted for.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e What does the 13x6 lace front mean on this wig?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e The 13x6 measurement refers to the lace panel dimensions — 13 inches across and 6 inches back from the hairline. This wide lace area allows for versatile parting options across the front of the wig. The HD transparent lace is designed to blend with a variety of skin tones for a natural-looking hairline.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 5:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this wig suitable for protective styling?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 5:\u003c\/strong\u003e This braided wig is an excellent protective styling option. The hand-braided cornrow base underneath keeps your natural hair neatly tucked away. Wearing this wig reduces daily manipulation and helps protect edges from tension and breakage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Can this braided lace front wig be worn without glue?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This wig is specifically designed for glueless wear. It uses adjustable straps, interior combs, and a silicone grip band to stay secure. No adhesive products are required for a comfortable, confident fit.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I detangle the curly sections after use?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Start by misting the curly ends lightly with water or a detangling spray. Use a wide-tooth comb or your fingers to gently work through tangles from the tips upward. Avoid pulling from the root, as this can loosen the lace or damage the fiber.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does this wig include a wig cap?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"A wig cap is included with this listing and has been confirmed present during our grading inspection. The adjustable straps and interior combs are also included and intact. All core accessories needed for wear are accounted for.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does the 13x6 lace front mean on this wig?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The 13x6 measurement refers to the lace panel dimensions — 13 inches across and 6 inches back from the hairline. This wide lace area allows for versatile parting options across the front of the wig. The HD transparent lace is designed to blend with a variety of skin tones for a natural-looking hairline.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is this wig suitable for protective styling?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This braided wig is an excellent protective styling option. The hand-braided cornrow base underneath keeps your natural hair neatly tucked away. Wearing this wig reduces daily manipulation and helps protect edges from tension and breakage.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis quickwig braided curly wig is a practical choice for anyone exploring protective lace styles on a budget. The glueless construction removes the barrier of salon-level adhesive application. The 26-inch length delivers a dramatic, full silhouette ideal for showcasing the curly ends. Whether worn with the braids front-facing or styled back, this wig adapts to your look. The synthetic fiber retains its curl memory, making re-wear simple after a light refresh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBoho braided wigs have surged in popularity as a versatile everyday style. They blend structure and texture in a way that reads both polished and effortless. This wig brings that aesthetic at a fraction of the retail price. With proper care and detangling, it can continue to deliver wearable, stylish results. It is priced to reflect its used fair condition honestly and transparently.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"quickwig","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":49412678090987,"sku":"LPNO459618479","price":17.63,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/ad1a57f6e20226aef10c3d2189cd466a.jpg?v=1789514694"},{"product_id":"esv-catholic-edition-holy-bible-gray-paperback-used","title":"ESV Catholic Edition Holy Bible Gray Paperback Used","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: C\u003c\/strong\u003e — Used – fair. Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Dent and crush damage at the bottom corner of the cover and binding, visible in close-up photo; remainder of book is clean with no marking, soiling, or internal wear.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eUsed – fair condition. This copy is fully functional and readable, but shows visible cosmetic wear: there is dent and crush damage at the bottom corner of the cover and binding, clearly visible in the close-up photos. The remainder of the book is clean — no markings, no soiling, no highlighting, and no internal wear to the pages. A solid choice for anyone who needs a reading copy at a budget-friendly price.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ESV Catholic Edition is the English Standard Version of the Holy Bible formatted specifically for Catholic readers. It includes the complete deuterocanonical books (also known as the Apocrypha) that are part of the Catholic biblical canon, making it fully suitable for personal prayer, study, and liturgical reference. The ESV translation is widely respected for its commitment to word-for-word accuracy while maintaining readability in contemporary English. This edition features a gray paperback cover and is a practical, portable format for everyday use at home, in a parish setting, or on the go.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eBible book (main volume) only\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTranslation: English Standard Version (ESV)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEdition: Catholic Edition\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFormat: Paperback\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCover color: Gray\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncludes deuterocanonical books per the Catholic canon\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCondition Details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGrade C — Used, fair. The text block is clean and completely usable. Cosmetic damage is limited to the bottom corner of the cover and binding (dent and crush damage). No writing, underlining, or staining inside. Please review all provided photos before purchasing — what you see is exactly what you will receive.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Urban Supply Plus","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50526442848491,"sku":"LPNO488508056","price":24.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/8f7ee57b2c8e87b2b1a8e2d19a8b20c2.jpg?v=1790293038"},{"product_id":"north-face-jester-backpack-womens-laptop-bag-ice-blue","title":"North Face Jester Backpack — Women's Laptop Bag, Ice Blue","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: GENTLY USED\u003c\/strong\u003e — Gently used. Used - Good. Fully functional with normal wear. Visible cosmetic wear.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. Fully functional with normal wear. Visible cosmetic wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe North Face Jester Women's Laptop Backpack is a trusted commuter and everyday carry. It features a water-repellent finish, ergonomic FlexVent suspension, and a roomy 22-liter main compartment. This backpack is ideal for students, professionals, and daily commuters. The Ice Blue colorway is a popular, versatile choice. Grab a premium backpack at a smart savings over retail.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUsed good condition — visible cosmetic wear is present on the exterior fabric and back panel. Scuff marks and light soiling are visible on the shoulder straps and back padding, consistent with normal daily use. All zippers operate smoothly and correctly. Seams and stitching are fully intact with no fraying. The bag retains its structured, self-standing shape.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe North Face Jester backpack is endorsed by the American Chiropractic Association. This endorsement recognizes the women-specific FlexVent suspension system inside. The FlexVent system uses a flexible yoke to distribute load evenly. Molded shoulder straps conform naturally to the body's shape. A padded back panel adds comfort during longer carries. The breathable lumbar panel promotes airflow against your back. A sternum strap provides additional stability during movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe main compartment offers generous 22-liter capacity for daily essentials. A dedicated padded laptop sleeve fits devices up to 16 inches. The sleeve cushions your computer against bumps and drops. Top grab handles allow quick single-hand access when needed. Two external mesh water bottle pockets keep hydration within easy reach. A front bungee cord system holds extra gear or a jacket securely. The bag stands on its own, making packing and unpacking easier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInside, a streamlined front compartment keeps smaller items organized. Interior zip pockets sort cables, chargers, and accessories. A dedicated tablet sleeve fits most standard tablet sizes. A built-in key clip prevents lost keys at the bottom of your bag. The interior lining is clean and free of tears or damage. The main zipper pulls are functional and easy to grip. Organization is intuitive whether you are heading to the office or campus.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe water-repellent finish helps protect contents from light rain and splashes. This finish is integrated into the nylon fabric at the manufacturing stage. It will not flake or peel with regular use. The exterior fabric is durable, abrasion-resistant nylon. The Ice Blue and TNF Black color combination remains vivid despite use. Dimensions are 11\" x 6.75\" x 17.25\" for a compact but capable profile. Total weight is approximately 1 lb 8 oz unloaded.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis Jester backpack is well-suited for office commutes, university use, and travel. It fits under standard airline seats and in overhead compartments. The ergonomic design reduces fatigue during multi-hour carries. Learn more about ergonomic backpack design and its benefits at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Backpack\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia's Backpack article\u003c\/a\u003e. Buying pre-owned is an environmentally responsible choice that reduces waste. You receive a fully functional commuter backpack at a fraction of the original retail price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e What condition is this North Face Jester backpack in?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e This backpack is graded Used - Good condition. It shows visible cosmetic wear including light scuffing and soiling on the back panel and shoulder straps, consistent with regular daily use. All functional elements — zippers, straps, buckles, and pockets — are in full working order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e What size laptop does the Jester backpack fit?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e The padded laptop sleeve is designed to accommodate laptops up to 16 inches in size. The sleeve interior measures approximately 12.75\" x 11\" and is padded on all sides. Most standard 13\", 14\", 15\", and 16\" laptops will fit comfortably and securely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this backpack suitable for daily commuting and travel?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Jester backpack is specifically designed for everyday commuter and travel use. Its 22-liter capacity handles a laptop, tablet, water bottle, and daily essentials with ease. The ergonomic FlexVent suspension system makes it comfortable for extended carries throughout the day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the water-repellent finish still work on a used backpack?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e The water-repellent finish on The North Face Jester is a DWR coating applied to the fabric itself. On a used backpack in good condition, this coating typically remains effective for light rain and splashes. If desired, the coating can be refreshed using a widely available spray-on DWR treatment product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What condition is this North Face Jester backpack in?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This backpack is graded Used - Good condition. It shows visible cosmetic wear including light scuffing and soiling on the back panel and shoulder straps, consistent with regular daily use. All functional elements — zippers, straps, buckles, and pockets — are in full working order.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What size laptop does the Jester backpack fit?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The padded laptop sleeve is designed to accommodate laptops up to 16 inches in size. The sleeve interior measures approximately 12.75\\\" x 11\\\" and is padded on all sides. Most standard 13\\\", 14\\\", 15\\\", and 16\\\" laptops will fit comfortably and securely.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is this backpack suitable for daily commuting and travel?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The Jester backpack is specifically designed for everyday commuter and travel use. Its 22-liter capacity handles a laptop, tablet, water bottle, and daily essentials with ease. The ergonomic FlexVent suspension system makes it comfortable for extended carries throughout the day.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does the water-repellent finish still work on a used backpack?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The water-repellent finish on The North Face Jester is a DWR coating applied to the fabric itself. On a used backpack in good condition, this coating typically remains effective for light rain and splashes. If desired, the coating can be refreshed using a widely available spray-on DWR treatment product.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe North Face brand is recognized globally for durable, performance-oriented gear. The Jester line has been a best-selling commuter backpack for years. It is a reliable choice for students, professionals, and travelers alike. This listing represents a rare opportunity to own a trusted backpack at a reduced price. Buying secondhand extends the life of quality goods and is better for the environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you need a laptop bag for the office or a commuter pack for campus, the Jester delivers. The combination of ergonomic support, smart organization, and water resistance makes it a standout backpack. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/apparel\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our Apparel Collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more great deals on name-brand items. Stock is limited on pre-owned backpacks at this quality level. Add this Jester backpack to your cart today before it sells out.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"The North Face","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50526444617963,"sku":"LPNO398068742","price":32.33,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/19196cadb9d57f826fc944fe2ec10d0e.jpg?v=1790293118"},{"product_id":"desenruis-frigidaire-water-filter-replacement-pack-of-3","title":"DESENRUIS Frigidaire Water Filter Replacement — Pack of 3","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: C\u003c\/strong\u003e — Used – fair. Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. One of the three filter cartridges has its individual plastic wrap unsealed\/opened; the other two remain factory-wrapped. No physical damage, discoloration, or moisture detected on any filter.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. One of the three filter cartridges has its individual plastic wrap unsealed\/opened; the other two remain factory-wrapped. No physical damage, discoloration, or moisture detected on any filter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis DESENRUIS 3-pack water filter replacement fits Frigidaire EPTWFU01 and EWF02 refrigerators. Each filter delivers clean, great-tasting water straight from your fridge. It is an affordable, NSF-certified alternative to OEM Frigidaire replacement cartridges. All three cartridges are physically intact with no damage observed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe filter uses a premium coconut shell carbon block as its filtration medium. Sri Lankan coconut shell carbon is selected for its superior purity and density. It offers 2x larger surface area compared to standard carbon media. More micropores mean more contaminants are trapped with every pass. This filter reduces up to 99% of lead and chlorine taste and odor. Your family gets cleaner, fresher-tasting water every day. The carbon block technology is a proven, industry-standard approach to home water filtration. It works passively — no electricity or special tools required. Each cartridge is rated for a flow rate of 0.528 gallons per minute. That keeps your refrigerator's water dispenser running at normal speed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThese water filter cartridges are made from BPA-free, food-grade materials throughout. There are no harmful plasticizers that could leach into your drinking water. The filter media removes contaminants without stripping beneficial minerals. Your body still gets the calcium, magnesium, and other minerals it needs. NSF\/ANSI Standard 42 certification is printed on the back label of each cartridge. Independent NSF certification means a third party has verified the materials and structural integrity. This is an important safety distinction over uncertified third-party filters. The EPA Establishment Number 100028-CHN-1 is also printed on the cartridge label. BPA-free construction is especially important for households with children or pregnant adults. This Frigidaire-compatible replacement gives you peace of mind at a fraction of the OEM price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe DESENRUIS DE022 filter is compatible with a wide range of Frigidaire refrigerator models. Confirmed compatible models include EPTWFU01, EPTWFU01C, EWF02, and PURE SOURCE ULTRA II. Additional compatible models include FFSC2323TS0, FFSC2323TS4, FFHD2250TS3, and FGHB2868TF. It also fits FGHB2868TF1, FGSC2335TF0, FGHB2868TR2, and FFHB2750TS0. Always verify your refrigerator model number before purchasing any water filter replacement. The model number is typically found inside the fridge door or on a label near the crisper drawer. This wide compatibility makes the DE022 one of the most versatile Frigidaire-compatible filters available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEach filter cartridge is designed for a six-month or 200-gallon service life. The product listing and some packaging reference 300 gallons; the cartridge label itself states 200 gallons — refer to your refrigerator's manual for the recommended interval. Replace sooner if you notice a significant drop in water flow rate. Operating temperature range is 33°F to 100°F. Operating pressure range is 30 psi to 100 psi. These specs match the standard operating conditions of most household refrigerators. Installation is a simple twist-and-lock process requiring no tools. Buying a 3-pack means you have replacements on hand for up to 18 months or more. That eliminates the inconvenience of last-minute filter shopping. Stocking up also saves money compared to purchasing single cartridges one at a time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTwo of the three cartridges in this set remain in their original factory plastic wrap. The third cartridge's plastic wrap has been unsealed but the filter itself shows no physical damage, discoloration, or moisture. All three cartridges are complete and ready for installation. This set represents a solid value for budget-conscious homeowners who need a reliable Frigidaire water filter replacement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more about how refrigerator water filtration technology works at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Water_filter\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\"\u003eWikipedia: Water Filter\u003c\/a\u003e. Understanding filtration basics helps you make smarter purchasing decisions for your home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our Home Collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more kitchen, appliance, and household essentials at great prices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this water filter a direct replacement for the Frigidaire EPTWFU01?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e The DESENRUIS DE022 is designed as a compatible replacement for the Frigidaire EPTWFU01 and EPTWFU01C models. It uses the same twist-and-lock form factor as the OEM Frigidaire filter. Always confirm your refrigerator's model number before installing any replacement filter cartridge.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e How often should I replace this water filter?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e The recommended replacement interval is every six months under normal use conditions. The cartridge label rates each filter for up to 200 gallons of filtered water. Replace sooner if you notice a noticeable reduction in water flow rate from your dispenser or ice maker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these filters certified safe for drinking water?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Each DESENRUIS DE022 cartridge carries NSF\/ANSI Standard 42 certification for materials and structural integrity. The filters are constructed from BPA-free, food-grade materials throughout. This certification is independently verified and the NSF seal is printed directly on the cartridge label for easy confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e What contaminants does this filter remove?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e The coconut shell carbon block media is rated to reduce up to 99% of lead and chlorine taste and odor. It targets common tap water contaminants that affect the flavor and safety of your drinking water. The filter is not designed to remove microbiologically unsafe water — it should be used with municipally treated or otherwise safe water supplies only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 5:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the condition of the packaging on this listing?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 5:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a used-condition set graded Fair by our inspection team. Two of the three cartridges remain in their original factory-sealed plastic wrap. The third cartridge's individual plastic wrap has been opened, though the filter itself shows no physical damage, discoloration, or moisture. See the product photos for a full visual inspection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is this water filter a direct replacement for the Frigidaire EPTWFU01?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The DESENRUIS DE022 is designed as a compatible replacement for the Frigidaire EPTWFU01 and EPTWFU01C models. It uses the same twist-and-lock form factor as the OEM Frigidaire filter. Always confirm your refrigerator's model number before installing any replacement filter cartridge.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How often should I replace this water filter?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The recommended replacement interval is every six months under normal use conditions. The cartridge label rates each filter for up to 200 gallons of filtered water. Replace sooner if you notice a noticeable reduction in water flow rate from your dispenser or ice maker.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Are these filters certified safe for drinking water?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Each DESENRUIS DE022 cartridge carries NSF\/ANSI Standard 42 certification for materials and structural integrity. The filters are constructed from BPA-free, food-grade materials throughout. This certification is independently verified and the NSF seal is printed directly on the cartridge label for easy confirmation.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What contaminants does this filter remove?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The coconut shell carbon block media is rated to reduce up to 99% of lead and chlorine taste and odor. It targets common tap water contaminants that affect the flavor and safety of your drinking water. The filter is not designed to remove microbiologically unsafe water — it should be used with municipally treated or otherwise safe water supplies only.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the condition of the packaging on this listing?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This is a used-condition set graded Fair by our inspection team. Two of the three cartridges remain in their original factory-sealed plastic wrap. The third cartridge's individual plastic wrap has been opened, though the filter itself shows no physical damage, discoloration, or moisture. See the product photos for a full visual inspection.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis DESENRUIS water filter replacement is a practical, cost-effective solution for Frigidaire refrigerator owners. Buying in a 3-pack format means you are prepared for your next one to two years of filter replacements. The coconut shell carbon block filtration technology is the same type used in many premium water filter brands. Choosing an NSF-certified filter ensures you are not sacrificing safety for savings. Clean, filtered water supports better hydration, better-tasting beverages, and cleaner ice cubes every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFrigidaire-compatible replacement filters like the DE022 offer significant savings over original equipment manufacturer cartridges. The filter fits quickly and securely into any compatible Frigidaire refrigerator without special tools. All three cartridges in this set are structurally intact and ready for installation. This is a smart, budget-friendly way to maintain your refrigerator's water filtration system. Shop confidently knowing each filter has been physically inspected before listing.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"DESENRUIS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50526449238251,"sku":"LPNO461510064","price":6.85,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/010081275d27c1f67873274259ec90fd.jpg?v=1790293326"},{"product_id":"hp-14-dq2031wm-14-notebook-intel-core-i3-4gb-128gb-ssd-used","title":"HP 14-dq2031wm 14\" Notebook Intel Core i3 4GB 128GB SSD Used","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: C\u003c\/strong\u003e — Used – fair. Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Keys feel stiff and stick down when pressed; cosmetic wear visible on lid and palm rest; no original box; charger included.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eUsed – fair. This HP 14-dq2031wm notebook is fully functional but shows visible cosmetic wear consistent with prior use. Please read the condition details carefully before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe HP 14-dq2031wm is a compact 14-inch everyday notebook powered by the Intel Core i3-1115G4 processor running at 3.0 GHz. It comes equipped with 4GB of RAM and a 128GB SSD for quick boot times and responsive day-to-day performance. The unit runs Windows 11 Home in S mode, keeping things streamlined for browsing, streaming, and light productivity tasks. Connectivity features include Bluetooth and a built-in webcam, making it a solid pick for video calls and wireless peripherals.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe silver lid shows the HP logo prominently, and the overall chassis is in a typical used-fair state — functional throughout, but carrying the marks of a laptop that has seen real-world use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCondition Details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is a used – fair unit (Grade C). It is fully functional but comes with the following known issues and cosmetic defects:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKeys feel stiff and stick down when pressed — keyboard functionality is present but the feel is degraded\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVisible cosmetic wear on the lid and palm rest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo original box included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharger is included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe encourage buyers to review all photos carefully. This laptop is priced to reflect its condition and is a good option for buyers comfortable with cosmetic wear and a stiff keyboard, or those planning a repair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHP 14-dq2031wm 14\" Notebook\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharger\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eModel: HP 14-dq2031wm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDisplay: 14\" HD\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProcessor: Intel Core i3-1115G4, 3.0 GHz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRAM: 4GB\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStorage: 128GB SSD\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOperating System: Windows 11 Home S\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConnectivity: Bluetooth, built-in webcam\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Urban Supply Plus","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67534945976555,"sku":"LPNO466448456","price":200.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/351249da19ae5f47ff5c058aab0dc70e.jpg?v=1790458681"},{"product_id":"carote-knife-set-4-knives-with-sheaths-original-box","title":"Carote Knife Set — 4 Knives with Sheaths, Original Box","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: C\u003c\/strong\u003e — Used – fair. Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Bread knife and sheath, and utility knife and sheath are missing from the 12-piece set; remaining 4 knives with 4 sheaths appear in like-new cosmetic condition with original box included.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Bread knife and sheath, and utility knife and sheath are missing from the 12-piece set; remaining 4 knives with 4 sheaths appear in like-new cosmetic condition with original box included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis listing offers a Carote 4-piece kitchen knife set sourced from an Amazon return. The set includes four knives, each paired with its matching protective sheath. The original Carote box is also included. This is a genuine Carote product, a brand well regarded for its nonstick-coated cookware and cutlery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCarote is a popular kitchen brand known for combining stylish design with everyday practicality. The knives in this set feature a cream-colored nonstick coating on the blades. Each blade is stamped with the Carote logo in a warm gold tone. The handles are molded in a tan wood-grain finish. This gives the set a natural, warm aesthetic that suits modern kitchens well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe four knives included are a large chef's knife, a large santoku-style knife, a slicing knife, and a small paring knife. Each knife type serves a distinct purpose at the cutting board. The chef's knife handles general chopping and dicing tasks with ease. The santoku is ideal for slicing vegetables and boneless proteins. The slicing knife works well on cooked meats and larger cuts. The paring knife is perfect for peeling and detail work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNonstick blade coatings reduce food sticking during prep work. This makes cleanup faster and more efficient after each use. The coating also adds a layer of corrosion resistance to the steel blade. Carote's nonstick blades are designed for everyday home cooking tasks. They are not intended for cutting through frozen foods or hard bones. Proper care extends the life of the nonstick surface considerably.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe wood-grain handles are ergonomically contoured for a comfortable grip. The grip fits naturally in most adult hand sizes. The handle material provides a secure hold even when hands are slightly damp. Each handle transitions smoothly into the bolster area of the knife. This design reduces hand fatigue during extended prep sessions. The overall balance of each knife feels intentional and user-friendly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEach knife ships with its own vented plastic sheath. The sheaths are cream-colored to match the blade coating. Ventilation slots in the sheaths allow airflow and prevent moisture buildup. This helps keep blades in good condition during storage. The sheaths snap firmly onto each blade for safe drawer or travel storage. They are a practical safety feature for any household kitchen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe original Carote packaging box is included with this set. The box shows typical shipping wear consistent with an Amazon return item. The knives themselves display visible cosmetic wear consistent with a used-fair grade. Please review all product photos carefully before purchasing. The blades show minor speckled marks from prior use. Handles retain their finish without significant scratching or damage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCompleteness note: The bread knife and sheath, and utility knife and sheath are missing from the original 12-piece set. The remaining 4 knives and 4 sheaths are present and accounted for. Buyers receive exactly what is shown in the product photos. This is an open-box return offered at a significant discount from retail pricing. It represents solid value for a buyer who does not need the missing pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor more information about kitchen knives and blade types, visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Kitchen_knife\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eKitchen Knife Wikipedia page\u003c\/a\u003e. It covers blade geometry, steel types, and care recommendations in depth. Understanding knife types helps you get the most from every knife in your kitchen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our Home Collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more kitchen tools, cookware, and home essentials at great prices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e What knives are included in this set?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e This set includes four Carote knives: a large chef's knife, a large santoku-style knife, a slicing knife, and a small paring knife. Each knife comes with its own vented plastic sheath. The original Carote box is also included with the set. The bread knife and utility knife from the original 12-piece set are not present in this listing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e What does the nonstick blade coating do?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e The nonstick coating on Carote knives helps reduce food from sticking to the blade during cutting. This makes prep work faster and cleanup much easier after each session. The coating also provides a degree of corrosion resistance to the underlying steel. It is best preserved by hand-washing the knives rather than using a dishwasher.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e How should I care for these knives to extend their life?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Hand-washing with mild soap and warm water is strongly recommended for nonstick-coated blades. Avoid soaking the knives or placing them in a dishwasher, as this degrades the coating over time. Store each knife with its sheath on to protect the blade edge and the nonstick surface. Honing with a standard honing rod is fine, but avoid aggressive sharpening stones that may damage the coating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the overall condition of the knives and handles?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e The four included knives show visible cosmetic wear on the blades, including minor speckled marks consistent with prior use. The handles retain their wood-grain finish and show no significant cracking or deep scratches. The sheaths are intact and functional. All product photos are available to help buyers evaluate condition before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What knives are included in this set?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"This set includes four Carote knives: a large chef's knife, a large santoku-style knife, a slicing knife, and a small paring knife. Each knife comes with its own vented plastic sheath. The original Carote box is also included with the set. The bread knife and utility knife from the original 12-piece set are not present in this listing.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does the nonstick blade coating do?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The nonstick coating on Carote knives helps reduce food from sticking to the blade during cutting. This makes prep work faster and cleanup much easier after each session. The coating also provides a degree of corrosion resistance to the underlying steel. It is best preserved by hand-washing the knives rather than using a dishwasher.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I care for these knives to extend their life?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Hand-washing with mild soap and warm water is strongly recommended for nonstick-coated blades. Avoid soaking the knives or placing them in a dishwasher, as this degrades the coating over time. Store each knife with its sheath on to protect the blade edge and the nonstick surface. Honing with a standard honing rod is fine, but avoid aggressive sharpening stones that may damage the coating.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the overall condition of the knives and handles?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The four included knives show visible cosmetic wear on the blades, including minor speckled marks consistent with prior use. The handles retain their wood-grain finish and show no significant cracking or deep scratches. The sheaths are intact and functional. All product photos are available to help buyers evaluate condition before purchasing.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCarote has built a strong reputation in the nonstick kitchen segment. Their knife designs match their popular cookware lines in color and style. Owning Carote knives creates a cohesive, coordinated kitchen aesthetic. The brand prioritizes accessible design at approachable price points. This makes Carote a popular choice for first-time kitchen setups and upgrades alike.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA nonstick kitchen knife set is a practical addition to any home cook's toolkit. Having dedicated sheaths for each knife promotes safe storage in drawers. Blade protection reduces dulling and accidental nicks over time. The four knife types in this set cover the majority of everyday cooking tasks. From peeling and paring to slicing and chopping, this Carote set delivers versatility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis listing is an excellent opportunity to acquire a Carote knife set at a discounted price. The missing pieces do not affect the utility of the four knives included. Budget-conscious cooks and secondary kitchen setups are ideal use cases. Check the photos and condition details, and buy with confidence from Urban Supply Plus.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Urban Supply Plus","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67535134916843,"sku":"LPNO493241607","price":9.79,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/50a9ac0df45dbf6faafdb76eee29a710.jpg?v=1790460807"},{"product_id":"aurivoy-dark-spot-remover-glow-serum-360-roller-20ml-used","title":"Aurivoy Dark Spot Remover Glow Serum 360° Roller 20ml Used","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: C\u003c\/strong\u003e — Used – fair. Used - Fair. Functional with visible cosmetic wear. Hygiene seal broken and roller ball not fully seated in applicator housing; serum is mostly full (\u0026gt;75%) with no leakage, label intact, and original box included.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eUsed – fair. This unit is functional with visible cosmetic wear. The hygiene seal has been broken and the roller ball is not fully seated in the applicator housing. The serum is mostly full (greater than 75% remaining) with no leakage, the label is intact, and the original box is included. Please review all condition details before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Aurivoy Dark Spot Remover Glow Serum is a targeted skincare treatment formulated to fade stubborn dark spots, sun spots, age spots, freckles, and melasma. At 0.67 fl. oz. (20ml), it delivers a concentrated dose of brightening ingredients through an innovative 360-degree roller applicator designed for precise, mess-free application directly onto problem areas of the face and body.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe formula is built around proven brightening actives — Vitamin C, Niacinamide, and Licorice Extract — which work together to visibly reduce discoloration and promote a more even, radiant skin tone over time. The texture is lightweight and non-greasy, absorbing quickly without leaving sticky residue, making it easy to layer with the rest of your skincare routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSuitable for all skin types — dry, oily, or combination — and gentle enough for use on sensitive areas. The 360° roller ensures the serum is delivered exactly where you need it, minimizing waste and mess.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAurivoy Dark Spot Remover Serum bottle with 360° roller applicator (0.67 fl. oz. \/ 20ml, serum \u0026gt;75% full)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOriginal box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eKey Specs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e Aurivoy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSize:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.67 fl. oz. (20ml)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApplicator:\u003c\/strong\u003e 360-degree roller\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eKey Ingredients:\u003c\/strong\u003e Vitamin C, Niacinamide, Licorice Extract\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSkin Types:\u003c\/strong\u003e All — dry, oily, combination, sensitive\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTarget Concerns:\u003c\/strong\u003e Dark spots, sun spots, age spots, freckles, melasma\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFormula:\u003c\/strong\u003e Lightweight, non-greasy, quick-absorbing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis is a used item sold as-is. The roller ball is not fully seated in the housing, which may affect application. Inspect photos carefully and refer to the condition note for full details.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Aurivoy","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67535139111147,"sku":"LPNO490045563","price":49.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/8120b8033ef92a3d7cc09be36a15b15f.jpg?v=1790461191"},{"product_id":"tebal-ultrasonic-retainer-cleaner-52khz-uv-dental-cleaner","title":"TEBAL Ultrasonic Retainer Cleaner — 52kHz UV Dental Cleaner","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: GENTLY USED\u003c\/strong\u003e — Gently used. Used - Good. Fully functional with normal wear. Minor cosmetic marks. One or two minor accessories missing.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. Fully functional with normal wear. Minor cosmetic marks. One or two minor accessories missing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe TEBAL Ultrasonic Retainer Cleaner delivers professional-grade dental appliance cleaning at home. It runs at 52,000Hz for a deep, thorough clean of retainers, night guards, aligners, dentures, and jewelry. This ultrasonic cleaner is a smart buy for anyone who needs reliable daily dental hygiene care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLight wear is present on the outer ABS plastic body — minor surface scuffs visible in the photos. The unit is fully functional and powers on normally. All three cleaning modes operate correctly and cycle to completion. The ultrasonic cleaner shows no cracks, no broken parts, and no damage to the tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOne or two minor accessories are missing — see product photos for the exact current contents. The main cleaner unit, cleaning basket, and power adapter are all present and confirmed working. Please review the inspection card images carefully before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe 52,000Hz ultrasonic frequency is the core strength of this retainer cleaner. Millions of microscopic cavitation bubbles are generated every second. These bubbles penetrate deep into every crevice and groove. They lift away plaque, tartar residue, and odor-causing bacteria. The result is a 360-degree clean that manual brushing simply cannot match. The process is gentle enough to protect delicate dental materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSix built-in UV lights add a second layer of sanitizing power. The UV light array surrounds the cleaning basket from all sides. Each cleaning cycle activates UV illumination automatically alongside the ultrasonic action. This dual-action approach targets lingering residue and odors. It leaves retainers and dentures smelling fresh after every cycle. The UV lights were confirmed illuminating during our functional test.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThree timed cleaning modes give you flexibility for different items. Mode one runs for three minutes — ideal for a quick daily retainer clean. Mode two runs for five minutes for a more thorough wash. Mode three runs for seven minutes for heavily soiled items or jewelry. Each mode pairs UV light with ultrasonic action automatically. Selecting a mode takes a single press of the TIME button. The digital display shows the countdown clearly throughout the cycle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eQuiet operation is a standout feature of this dental cleaner. Noise output stays below 45 decibels during normal use. That is quieter than a typical conversation. You can run it in the bathroom at night without disturbing anyone nearby. Four non-slip rubber feet on the base absorb vibration and keep the unit stable on countertops. The compact cylindrical design fits neatly on a bathroom shelf or in a travel bag. It is suitable for all ages and requires no technical knowledge to operate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tank is built from insulated SUS 304 stainless steel for durability and safety. The outer housing uses sturdy ABS plastic. The 250ml capacity is sufficient for retainers, mouth guards, dentures, braces, and small jewelry items. The power adapter is a standard wall-plug design and is included with this listing. Learn more about how ultrasonic cleaning technology works on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Ultrasonic_cleaning\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia's Ultrasonic Cleaning page\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis retainer cleaner is a practical upgrade from soaking tablets alone. Ultrasonic cavitation reaches places that tablets and manual brushes miss entirely. Dentists frequently recommend ultrasonic cleaning for orthodontic appliances. Regular ultrasonic cleaning extends the life of retainers and aligners. It also keeps them hygienic between dental appointments. For anyone wearing Invisalign, Hawley retainers, or night guards, this cleaner is an essential tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more personal care deals in our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our Personal Care Collection\u003c\/a\u003e for similar savings on inspected and graded items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does this ultrasonic retainer cleaner actually work on Invisalign aligners and night guards?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ultrasonic cleaning is widely recommended for removable dental appliances including Invisalign aligners, Hawley retainers, and night guards. The 52,000Hz frequency generates cavitation bubbles that penetrate micro-grooves in aligner material. This removes biofilm and calcite deposits that soak tablets leave behind. Many orthodontists suggest ultrasonic cleaning as the gold standard for aligner hygiene. This TEBAL cleaner uses the same core technology found in professional dental office units.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e What accessories are included with this used cleaner, and what is missing?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e The main cleaner unit, the inner cleaning basket, and the power adapter are all present and confirmed working in our inspection. One or two minor accessories may be absent — please study the product photos carefully to verify the current contents before purchasing. The inspection card image in the final photo provides the most detailed breakdown of what was tested and what was noted as missing. Items like the user manual are common omissions that do not affect core functionality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is it safe to clean jewelry in this ultrasonic cleaner alongside dental items?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 3:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ultrasonic cleaners are widely used in jewelry shops to clean rings, bracelets, and earrings. The cavitation action lifts dirt, oils, and polish residue from metal settings and gemstone facets. The TEBAL retainer cleaner's stainless steel tank is safe for use with plain water or mild cleaning solutions. It is advisable to clean dental items and jewelry in separate cycles. Always check gemstone compatibility before ultrasonic cleaning — some porous stones like pearls or opals are not suitable for ultrasonic treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e How loud is this cleaner during a cycle?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e The TEBAL cleaner is rated below 45 decibels during operation. For reference, 45 decibels is roughly equivalent to a quiet library or a soft rainfall. Our functional test confirmed quiet, smooth operation with no abnormal rattling or buzzing. Four rubber feet on the base help absorb vibration and reduce surface noise transfer. This makes it suitable for use in a bathroom or bedroom at any hour without causing disturbance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion 5:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the maximum water temperature I should use?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer 5:\u003c\/strong\u003e The warning label visible on the rear of the unit states that water temperature should not exceed 130°F (approximately 54°C). Using water above this temperature can affect the transducer performance and may reduce the lifespan of the unit. Room-temperature or slightly warm tap water is ideal for most dental cleaning tasks. Always allow the unit a 15-minute rest period after 20 consecutive minutes of use before running another cycle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does this ultrasonic retainer cleaner actually work on Invisalign aligners and night guards?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Ultrasonic cleaning is widely recommended for removable dental appliances including Invisalign aligners, Hawley retainers, and night guards. The 52,000Hz frequency generates cavitation bubbles that penetrate micro-grooves in aligner material. This removes biofilm and calcite deposits that soak tablets leave behind. Many orthodontists suggest ultrasonic cleaning as the gold standard for aligner hygiene. This TEBAL cleaner uses the same core technology found in professional dental office units.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What accessories are included with this used cleaner, and what is missing?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The main cleaner unit, the inner cleaning basket, and the power adapter are all present and confirmed working in our inspection. One or two minor accessories may be absent — please study the product photos carefully to verify the current contents before purchasing. The inspection card image in the final photo provides the most detailed breakdown of what was tested and what was noted as missing. Items like the user manual are common omissions that do not affect core functionality.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is it safe to clean jewelry in this ultrasonic cleaner alongside dental items?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Ultrasonic cleaners are widely used in jewelry shops to clean rings, bracelets, and earrings. The cavitation action lifts dirt, oils, and polish residue from metal settings and gemstone facets. The TEBAL retainer cleaner's stainless steel tank is safe for use with plain water or mild cleaning solutions. It is advisable to clean dental items and jewelry in separate cycles. Always check gemstone compatibility before ultrasonic cleaning — some porous stones like pearls or opals are not suitable for ultrasonic treatment.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How loud is this cleaner during a cycle?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The TEBAL cleaner is rated below 45 decibels during operation. For reference, 45 decibels is roughly equivalent to a quiet library or a soft rainfall. Our functional test confirmed quiet, smooth operation with no abnormal rattling or buzzing. Four rubber feet on the base help absorb vibration and reduce surface noise transfer. This makes it suitable for use in a bathroom or bedroom at any hour without causing disturbance.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the maximum water temperature I should use?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The warning label visible on the rear of the unit states that water temperature should not exceed 130°F (approximately 54°C). Using water above this temperature can affect the transducer performance and may reduce the lifespan of the unit. Room-temperature or slightly warm tap water is ideal for most dental cleaning tasks. Always allow the unit a 15-minute rest period after 20 consecutive minutes of use before running another cycle.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe TEBAL ultrasonic retainer cleaner is an affordable entry point into professional dental appliance hygiene. Buying this inspected, graded unit saves you significantly versus the retail price. Every unit sold by Urban Supply Plus is tested for core functionality before listing. You can trust that this cleaner powers on, vibrates, and cycles correctly. The minor cosmetic wear does not affect performance in any way.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMaintaining a clean retainer or aligner protects your oral health long-term. Bacterial buildup on dental appliances can transfer to gums and teeth during wear. Daily ultrasonic cleaning takes only three to seven minutes. It removes more contamination than brushing alone in a fraction of the time. This retainer cleaner is a worthwhile investment for orthodontic patients of all ages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compact footprint means this dental cleaner travels well. Slip it into a toiletry bag or carry-on for trips. The power adapter supports standard US wall outlets. Running the three-minute mode each morning keeps retainers consistently clean. Over time, ultrasonic cleaning also helps prevent discoloration and mineral buildup inside the retainer material itself.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TEBAL","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67535140651243,"sku":"LPNO463061915","price":18.61,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/a414df78157dc391d374239a280d9b02.jpg?v=1790461236"},{"product_id":"titanium-hammered-pro-frying-pan-12-inch-used","title":"Titanium Hammered Pro Frying Pan 12 Inch Used","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: B\u003c\/strong\u003e — Used – good. Used - Good. Fully functional with normal wear. Visible cosmetic wear.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eUsed – good. Fully functional with normal wear and visible cosmetic wear. Pan is complete and ready for everyday cooking.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is the Titanium Hammered Pro 12-inch frying pan, model 12IN-TAIGUO-LM. Built with premium titanium and a durable multi-layer construction, it features a distinctive hammered cooking surface that adds both character and functionality. The spacious 12-inch cooking area gives you plenty of room for family-sized meals — from sautéed vegetables and stir-fries to seared meats and seafood. The ergonomic titanium handle is designed to stay cooler during stovetop use and provides a secure, comfortable grip session after session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12-inch hammered titanium cooking surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMulti-layer construction for faster, more even heat distribution\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eErgonomic stay-cool titanium handle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatible with all cooktops: induction, gas, electric, ceramic, halogen, and glass\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOven-safe construction for versatile cooking methods\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eScratch-resistant, durable build\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003e12-inch Titanium Hammered Pro frying pan (pan only — no lid present)\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eNote: The original listing includes a lid; this unit ships without one. Please review photos carefully before purchasing.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e Titanium\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eModel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12IN-TAIGUO-LM\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSize:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12 inch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Gray \/ silver hammered finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCategory:\u003c\/strong\u003e Cookware – Skillets \u0026amp; Frying Pans\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMSRP:\u003c\/strong\u003e $72.86\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis pan has been inspected and confirmed fully functional. Normal cosmetic wear consistent with prior use may be visible on the surface or handle. A great opportunity to get a quality titanium pan at a significant discount from retail.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"NKDFRI","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68011484119275,"sku":"LPNO518580147","price":30.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/e8a6d0667c830686852a89d04a6ab0e7.jpg?v=1791927316"}],"url":"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/used.oembed?page=2","provider":"Urban Supply Plus","version":"1.0","type":"link"}